You are on page 1of 244

HANDBOOK

ON
INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS
PART3 RIVETS,PINS,NAILS,KEYSAND
KEYWAYS,COTTERSANDOTHERNONTHREADEDFASTENERS

BUREAU OF INDIAN
MANAK

BHAVAN,

STANDARDS

9 BAHADUR SHAH
NEW DELHI 110 002

ZAFAR

MARG

gijj
I,
,;X1
I.,<

SP :29(Part3)- 1987

FIRST PUBLISHED MARCH 1989


FIRST REPRINT SEPTEMBER 1990

@ BUREAU -OF INDIAN STANDARDS

UDC 621.882.2/4.082(021)
ISBN 81-7061-005-2

PRICE Rs 280.00

PRINTED IN INDIA BY TARA ART PRESS, B-4 HANS BHAWAN, BAHADUR SHAH ZAFAR
AND PUBLISHED BY BUREAU OF INDIAN STANDARDS,
NEW DELHI-110002

MARG,

NEW DELHI- 110002;

PREFACE

The Bureau of Indian Standards is the national standards body working on standardization
front in this
country.
Its object is to promote fhe development
and adoption of standards
on national and
international
basis with a view to facilitate national and international
exchange of goods and services.
The standards play an important role in ensuring human safety and health, to safeguard consumers
interests and also have significant bearing on the national and world economy.
To make available the benefits of Indian Standards to the common man, BIS has introduced its
certification
marks scheme under the Bureau of Indian Standards Act, 1987. According to this Act,
quality goods conforming to Indian Standards carry the Standard Mark. This mark is the third party
guarantee for quality of the marked goods. Licences to use the Standard Mark are granted to the
manufacturers
using reliable methods of production and quality control subject to overall supervision
by BIS.
At international
level, BIS represents India on the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO) and the International
Electrotechnical
Commission
(IEC). BIS participates
in most of the
technical committees of IS0 and IEC.
While continuing
with the task of standardization,
which is a dynamic process, BIS has already
published national standards totalling over 11000 on wide-ranging subjects. Indian Standards are
generally published in booklet form in A-4 and A-5 sizes for any specific product/ aspect. A large crosssection of the users of these standards have often expressed their desire to have Indian Standards in
certain areas in the form of comprehensive handbooks. It is felt that these handbooks will provide easy
reference and also make Indian Standards more easily accessible to a larger public. Further, the
handbooks shall also help the user in understanding
the provisions of the standards which will enable
them to put the standards to better use.
In view of the above,the Bureau of Indian Standards
specific areas and the Industrial Fasteners Handbook

is bringing out a series of handbooks


is one of this series.

in certain

INTRODUCTION
A fastener is a mechanical device used for holding two or more bodies in definite positions with
respect to each other. The fasteners assume great importance as most of the engineering equipment and
machinery are, today, made up of many assemblies, which use fasteners to hold various components
together. Based on the application intended, fastener receives varying degree of built-in precision and
engineering capability. This has been adequately covered in the various national standards on fasteners.
Although, fasteners are low cost items in the assemblies when compared with the the total cost of
equipment, their importance cannot be under-estimated
because of the functional role they play. The
fasteners have a wide application in the entire gamut of industry. No wonder, it is said that a fastener is a
connective tissue of the industrial copus. A large cross-section of the users of the standards have often
expressed their desire to have Indian Standards available in a comprehensive
form and hence, this
Handbook
on Industrial Fasteners has been compiled.
The Handbook on Industrial Fasteners is one of the series of handbooks to be brought out by the
Bureau of Indian Standards.
Once published, the Handbook shall fulfil the long felt need for the
availability of Indian Standards on fasteners and related subjects in a comprehensive
form.
The Handbook on Industrial Fasteners is being issued in three parts. Part 1 covers standards on basic
features of fasteners, technical supply conditions
and raw materials for fasteners. However, the
standards on general engineering materials in use in the fasteners industry have not been covered.
Besides this, Part 1 also covers few general engineering standards and other standards in the related
field.
Part 2 covers the product
Part 3 covers standards
The national
Committees:

standards

standards

on bolts screws, studs, nuts and washers.

on rivets, pins, nails, keys and keyways, totters,


on fasteners

have been formulated

circlips, and set-collars,

mainly by the following

etc.

three Sectional

EDC 27 Bolts, Nuts and Fasteners Accessories


EDC 70 Screw Threads
EDC 71 Rivets (since merged with EDC 27)
As an aid to understanding
and application of the work of the above three Sectional Committees as
well as to cover other standards on fasteners, standards have also been included from the work of the
following Sectional Committees
EDC
1
EDC 11
EDC 12
EDC 15
EDC 20
EDC 39
EDC_ 43
EDC 44
EDC 50
EDC 61
EDC 74
MCPD 19
SMDC
1
SMDC
5
SMDC 10
SMDC 11
SMDC 17
SMDC 19

Engineering Standards
Machine Tools
Hand Tools
Builders Hardware
Drawings
Rolling Bearings
Engineering Metrology
Transmission
Devices
Mining
Conveyors, Vertical Hoists and Bucket Elevators
Aircraft and Space Vehicles
Packaging of Engineering Goods
Metal Standards
Wrought Steel Products
Light Metals and Their Alloys
Copper and Copper Alloys
Foundry
Alloy Steels and Special Steels

This Handbook
is a compilatlon of the national standards in the field of Industrial
Wherever practicable, corrections and amendments to the standards have been incorporated

Fasteners.
in the text.

The A-4 size standards


have been reproduced
as it is whereas A-5 size standards
have been
recomposed to match the style and format of A-4 size standards in order to haveuniform
presentation.
The Handbook has been divided into different sections, each one covering a group of standards on a
specific type or aspect of fasteners. The standards in each section are arranged in numerical order.
Numerical index is provided for the complete Handbook for easy location of a specific standard,
number of which is known to the user. The keyword (descriptors) index is provided at the end for easy
location of a standard, if the subject is known to the user.
This Handbook has been updated till March 1987. However, standardization
being a dynamic and
continuous process, users of the Handbook should take into account the fact that published standards
are subject to review and possible revision. It is pointed out that only the latest available edition is the
valid standard.

CONTENTS
Page
SECTION A

RIVETS

IS : 866-1957

Specification for Tinmens Rivets

IS : 1928-1961

Specification for Boiler Rivets (12 to 48 mm Diameter)

IS : 1929-1982

Specification for Hot Forged Steel Rivets for Hot Closing


(12 to 36 mm Diameter) (jirst revision) (with Amendment No. 1 & 2)

12

Specification for Cold Forged Solid Steel Rivetes for Hot Closing (6 to 16 mm
Diameter) first revision) (with Amendment No. 1)

18

IS : 2907-1964

Specification for Non-ferrous Rivets (1.6 to 10 mm)

23

IS : 2998-1982

Specification for Cold Forged Steel Rivets for Cold Closing (I to 16 mm


Diameter) first revision)

29

IS : 3974-1967

Specification for Bifurcated Rivets for General Purposes

36

IS : 4040-1967

Specification for Solid-Drilled Tubular and Semi-tubular Rivets

39

IS : 4732-1968

Specification for Rivets for Shipbuilding

42

IS : 9086-1979

Specification for Universal Head Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

45

IS : 9087-1979

Specification for 100 Countersunk Aluminium Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

49

IS : 9088-1979

Specification for Universal Head Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

54

IS : 9093-1979

Specification for 100 Countersunk Nickel Alloy Rivets for Aircraft

57

IS : 2155-1982

SECTION B

61

PINS

IS : 549-1974

Specification for Split Pins (second revision)

63

IS : 2393-1980

Specification for Cylindrical Pins (second revision)

66

IS : 3524
(Part I)-1982

Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 1 With Internal Threads

IS : 3524
(Part 2)-1982

Specification for Threaded Taper Pins: Part 2 With External Threads


(j%st revision)

71

IS : 4981-1984

Specification for Guide Pins for Foundry Pattern Plates (second revision)

74

IS : 6401-1971

Specification for Dowel Pins for Use in Foundries

77

IS : 6688-1981

Specification for Taper Pins lfirst revision)

83

IS : 6689-1972

Specification for Hardened Cylindrical Pins

86

IS : 6862-1981

Specification for Clevis Pins (@St revision)

88

IS : 6863-1973

Specification for Clevis Pins with Head

91

IS : 7368-1974

Specification for Grooved Taper Pins

94

IS : 7383-1974

Specification for Grooved Knuckle Pins

first

revision)

68

97

IS : ,7384-1974

Specification for Grooved Straight Pins with Guide End

100

IS : 7385-1974

Specification for Grooved Dowel Pins

104

IS : 7386-1974

Specification for Grooved Socket Pins

107

IS : 8351-1977

Specification for Spiral Pins (Heavy Duty Type)

110

IS : 8379-1977

Specification for Spiral Pins (Medium Duty Type)

113

IS : 10248-I 982

Specification for Cylindrical Pins with Internal Threads

117

SECTION C

NAILS

IS : 723-1972

Specification for Steel Countersunk Head Wire Nails (second revision)

121
123

IS : 725-1961

Specification for Copper Wire Nails (revised)

129

IS : 6730-1972

Specification for Felt Nails

134

IS : 6732-1972

Specification for Double Point Nails

137

IS : 6733-1972

Specification for Wall and Roofing Nails

139

IS : 6734-1972

Specification for Cut Lath and Lath Nails

142

IS : 6738-1972

Specification for Panel Pins and Lost Head Nails

145

SECTION D

KEYS, KEYWAYS AND COTTERS

149

IS : 2048-1983

Specification for Parallel Keys and Keyways (second revision)

151

IS : 2291-1981

Specification for tangential Keys and Keyways (second revision)

160

IS : 2292-1974

Specification for Taper Keys and Keyways first revision)

163

IS : 2293-1974

Specification for Gib-head Keys and Keyways (first revision)

168

IS : 2294-1980

Specification for Woodruff Keys and Keyways cfirst revision)

172

IS : 2638-1974

Specification for Flat Split Cotters first revision)

175

IS : 6166-1971

Specification for Thin Taper Keys and Keyways

178

IS : 6167-1971

Specification for Thin Parallel Keys and Keyways

181

SECTION E

MISCELLANEOUS

IS : 2995-1965

Dimensions for set collars

IS : 3075
(Part l)-1986

Specification for Circlips : Part 1 For Shafts Cfirst revision)

IS : 3075
(Part 2)-1986

Specification for Circlips : Part 2 For Bores Cfirst revision)

IS : 3075
(Part 3)-1986

Specification for Circlips : Part 3 Type E for shafts Cfirst revision)

IS : 4762-1984

187
191
206
221

Specification for Worm Drive Hose Clamps for General Purposes


@St

IS : 5988-1970

185

revision)

Specification for Spring Dowel Sleeves (Light and Heavy Patterns) for Use in
Foundries

227
232

Index

235

Numerical Index

237

IS0 Standards on Rivets, Pins and other Non-threaded Fasteners

238

SECTION
Rivets

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 866 - 1957

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
TINMENS RIVETS

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 14 October 1957, on approval by
the Building Division Council of the draft finalized on 25 June 1957 by the Builders Hardware Sectional
Committee.
0.2 Tinmens rivets are commonly used in light sheet metal work, such as the manufacture
of buckets, steel
trunks and fabrication
of air-conditioning
ducts. As fasteners, they are required to conform to specific
requirements
regarding hardness, strength and workability. This standard specifies these requirements and has
been prepared with a view to guiding the consumers in procuring rivets of the desirable qualities suitable for light
sheet metal work. The specification covers rivets having lengths and diameters up to and including 14.3 mm and
7.0 mm, respectively. Large sizes of rivets known as flat head rivets are proposed to be covered by a separate
specification.
0.3 The Sectional Committee responsible for the preparation of this standard has taken into consideration
the
views of producers, consumers and technologists, and has related the standard to the prevailing manufacturing
and trade practices followed in the country in regard to the use of fhese rivets. Assistance has also been derived
from printed catalogues of manufacturers
of tinmens rivets.
0.4 This standard

requires

reference

to IS : 280-1951 Specification

0.4.1 Wherever a reference to IS : 280-195 1 appears in this standard,


version of the specification.

for mild steel wire (tentative).


it shall be taken as a reference to the latest

0.5 In pursuance of the decision of the Government


of India to introduce uniform system of weights and
measures throughout the country based on the metric system, all dimensions appearing in the standard have been
expressed in metric units.
0.6 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this specification is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1949 Rules for rounding off numerical values; the number of places retained in the rounded off value
should be the same as those of the specified value in the standard.
0.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical provisions
it does not include all the necessary provisions of a contract.

relating to the supply of tinmens rivets and

1. Scope
1.1 This standard lays down the requirements
rivets of sizes with even designating numbers

regarding material, shape and dimensions,


ranging from 2 to 20 inclusive.

and test for tinmens

2. Terminology
2.0 For the purpose

of this standard,

2.1 Nominal

Diameter

2.2 Nominal
the shank.

Length of the Rivet -

the following

of the Rivet -

The diameter

definitions

shall apply.

of the rivet shank.

The length measured from the underside

of the head to the extreme end of

3. Material
3.1 Mild steel wire used in the manufacture
3.1.1 The condition
under 7.

of tinmens

rivets shall conform

of wire selected by the manufacturer

3.1.2 The heat treatment

appropriate

to the condition

to IS : 280-1951.

shall be subject to the requirements

of wire used shall conform

laid down

to that specified under 7.

4. Shape and Dimensions


4.1 The shape of tinmens
Table I.

rivets shall be as shown in Fig. 1 and their dimensions

shall be in accordance
7

HANDBOOKONlNDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3

with

IS :$66

- 1957

FIG.

TABLE

RIVET

DIMENSIONS
OF TINMENS
( Clause 4.1 and Fig. 1 )

RIVETS

Head Thickness

Head Dia

Shank
Dia

Length

Rivet
Size.
Designating
Number

1 TINMENS

(B)
h

<

(0)

Max

Min

W)
A
Max

Min

(1)

(2)
mm

(3)
mm

(4)
mm

(5)
mm

(6)
mm

(7)
mm

2
4
6
8
10
12
14
16
18
20

4.0
4.8
5.2
6.0
6.8
8.3
9.1
11.5
12.7
14.3

2.1
2.4
2.7
3.1
3.8
4.2
5.2
5.6
6.4
7.0

4.2
4.8
5.6
6.4
7.8
8.5
10.7
11.4
13.0
14.3

4.0
4.6
5.3
6.0
7.4
8.1
10.2
10.8
12.3
13.6

0.6---0.6
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.1
1.4
1.5
1.7
1.9

0.5
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.9
0.9
1.1
1.2
1.4
1.6

5. Tolerance
5.1 The tolerance

on shank diameter

of tinmens

rivets shall be as given below:

Rivet Size
Designating

Shaizk Diameter
(If)

Number

2 to 12 both inclusive
14 to 20 both inclusive

5.2 The tolerance

on length of tinmens

At End

+ofaS
I - 0.13
+ 0.08
{ - 0.15

TZl
-0.13
i- Nil
-0.15

rivets shall be as given below:

Rivet Size
Designating

Length
CL)
mm
+ 0.38
- 0.13

Number

2 to 14 both inclusive
16 to 20 both inclusive
6. Workmanship

c
Under Head

f 0.38

and Finish

6.1 The rivets shall be sound, free from cracks, flaws, burrs, seams, pits and other defects. The head shall be
concentric with and at right angles to the shank. The end shall be cleanly sheared square.
7. Heat Treatment
7.1 General -

The most satisfactory

metallurgical

upper critical point of the steel but provision


annealed vnter-annealed
wire.
.r
4

structure

is obtained

is also made for subcritically

HANDBOOK

if the rivets are annealed


annealed

above the

rivets and rivets made from

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :866 - 1957
7.2 Rivets should preferably be annealed at a temperature
above the upper critical Point appropriate
to the
carbon content of the wire. If the rivets are so annealed, the manufacturer
shall be free to select the hardness of
the wire without any limitation.
7.2.1 When annealed at a temperature above the upper critical point, the rivets shall remain at the following
temperature
for not less than 15 minutes:
a) When made from wire having a carbon content not exceeding 0.20 percent
b) When made from wire having a carbon content exceeding 0.20 percent but not
exeeding

920 C
88OOC

0.30 percent

7.3 Rivets may be subcritically


condition only.
7.3.1 When subcritically
30 minutes.

annealed

annealed,

provided

they are manufactured

the rivets shall remain

from wire in the half hard or hard

at a temperature

of 650-680C

for not less than

7.4 Rivets shall not require any heat treatment when manufactured
a tensile strength not exceeding 44 kg per sq mm.

FIG. 2 RlVETlNG

from annealed

or inter-annealed

wire having

TEST

8. Test

8.1 Tinmens

rivets shall comply with the requirements

8.1.1 Hardness test in tht-shank.

of tests specified under 8.1.1 and 8.1.2.

Rivets shall have Brine11 or Diamond

Pyramid hardness not exceeding

150 when tested

8.1.2 Riveting test - Rivet shall be inserted in the appropriate


hole in a plate so that the length of shank
protruding
is equal to the diameter of rivet. The shank protruding shall be flattened by hammering until the
thickness of the flattened portion is not more than 0.4 time the nominal diameter of the rivet (see Fig. 2), the
periphery of the flattened portion being free from cracks.
9. Packing
9.1 Tinmens rivets shall be packed in 2.5 kg or 5 kg parcels or cardboard
according to the requirements
of the purchaser.

cartons,

or in 50 kg gunny bags

10. Marking
10.1 Each package

shall be clearly and indelibly

marked

with the following:

a) Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
b) Size of the rivets, and
c) Weight of the package.
10.2 Each package

may also be marked

with the ISI Standard

Certification

Mark.

Note - The use of the IS.1Certification Mark is governed by the provisions ofthe Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act, 1952and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of ISI Certification Mark
may be granted to manufacturers or processers may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1928 - 1961

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR BOILER RIVETS
( 12 TO 48 mm DIAMETER
)

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 October 1961, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads Sectional Committee had been approved by the Engineering Division Council.
0.2 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared by the Institution on metric screw threads
and fasteners. This standard deals with mild steel rivets intended for use in the construction
of boilers. The
question of preparing a similar standard for high tensile rivets for,boiler construction
is under consideration.
0.3 At the level of the
ISO/TC7 Rivets, has at
considerably
modifying
international
agreement

International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO), the Technical Committee,
present under consideration
a proposal to unify the metric and inch sizes of rivets by
the tolerance on the shank diameter or rivets. However, for obvious reasons,
on the subject is likely to take time to materialize.

0.4 Wherever a reference to any standard


version of the standard.

appears in this specification,

it shall be taken as a reference to the latest

0.5 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised), The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
0.6 Metric system has been adopted
in this system.

in India and all dimensions

0.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical


include all the necessary provisions of a contract.

and quantities

provisions

in this standard

relating to boiler rivets

have been given


and it does not

1. Scope
1.1 This standard

prescribes

the requirements

for boiler rivets, 12 to 48 mm in diameter.

2. Material
2.1 The rivets shall be manufactured
and stay bars for boilers.

from material

conforming

to 1s : 1990-1962 Specification

for stee1rivets

3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets may be made either by cold-heading or by hot-forging. If rivets are made by the cold-heading process,
they shall subsequently
be adequately heat-treated so that the stresses set up in the cold-heading process are
eliminated.
If they are made by hot-forging process, care shall be taken to see that the finished rivets cool
gradually.
4. Freedom

from Defects

4.1 The rivets shall be cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks. They shall be free from
imperfections
and heavy scales. The ends of rivets shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or burr.
5. Dimensions
5.1 Length-Diameter
given in Table 1.

Combinations

The preferred

5.2 Diameters of Rivets and Rivet Holes specified in Table 2.


5.3 Dimensions of Rivet Heads diameter, shown in Fig. 1 to 11.

length and diameter

The diameters

combinations

of rivets and corresponding

The heads of rivets shall conform to the proportions,

of rivets shall be as
rivet holes shall be as
in terms of the nominal

6. Tolerances
6.1 Shank Diameter
6.1.1 Nominal

diameters

(0)

12 to 24 mm

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :1928 - 1961
6.1.1.1 For rivets, five diameters long and under, the following tolerances shall apply (see Fig. 10):

a) At position X

+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm

b) At position Y

+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 -mm

c) Anywhere between position X andY

Diameter not to be greater than the maximum diameter


at position X nor less than the minimum diameter at
position Y

d) Out of roundness at any cross-section

Not more than 0.2 mm within the sizes resulting from the
tolerances mentioned in (a), (b) and (c)

6.1.1.2 For rivets above five diameters in length, the following tolerances shall apply (see Fig. 11):
a) At position X

+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm

b) At position Y

+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm

c) At position 2

+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm
Diameter not greater than the maximum diameter at
position X nor less than the minimum diameter at
position Y

d) Between positions X and Y

e) Between positions Y and 2

+ 0.0 mm
- 0.5 mm

f)

Not more than 0.4 mm within the sizes resulting from the
tolerances mentioned in (a), (b), (c), (d) and @I.

Out of roundness at any cross-section

TABLE1 PREFERREDLENGTHAND

DIAMETER

COMBINATIONS

FOR RIVETS

( Clause 5.1 )

Alldimensions
Length

28
31.5
35.5
40
45
50
56
63
71
80
85
90
95
100
106
112
118
125
132
140
150
160
180
200
224
250

DiallWterS
12
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-

Note -

16
-

14
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
X
X
-

Preferred

De&nation
Snap

in millimetres.

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

18
-

20
-

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
-

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
X
-

combinatrons

22
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

are indicated

24
X

27
-

30
-

33
_
_
-

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
xxicx
x
-

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
-

x
x
x
-

x
x
x
X
-

by X.

Example:

Head BoilerRiver20 X 90 (IS : 1928-1961).

36
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

39
-

42
-

48
-

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x

x
x

x
x
x
x

x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x
x

IS :1928 - 1961
TABLE 2

RfVET HOLE DIAMETERS

AND TOLERANCES

ON THE HEAD

{ Clauses 5.2 and 6.3 )


All dimensions
Basic
Size of
Rivet

Rivet Hole
Diameter
Min

6.1.2Nominal
Fig. 10 and 1 I):
a)

At position

Tolerancee on
A

\
,

12

13.0

CSK head both


types (Fig. 7
and 8)
c
f 0.35

14

15.0

f 0.4

f 1.2

16

17.0

f 0.5

f 1.2

18

19.0

f 0.5

f 1.2

20

21.0

f 0.8

f 1.2

22

23.0

f 0.8

f 1.2

24

25.0

f 0.8

f 1.2

27

28.5

f 0.8

f 1.2

30

31.5

f 0.8

f 1.2

33

34.5

f 0.8

f 1.2

36

37.5

f 1.6

f 1.2

39

41.0

f 1.6

f 1.2

42

44.0

f 1.6

i 1.2

48

50.0

f 1.6

zk 1.2

diameters

Height
of Head

Diameter of Head

in milbmetres.

All other types

of head (Fig. 1
to 6 and 9)
/
i 1.2

(D) above 24 mm up to 48 mm -

Permissible .
Eccentricity
of Head
(a-b in

Fig. 12)
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 0.8
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
+ 1.2
- 0.0
-I- 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0
+ 1.6
- 0.0

0.7

The following

tolerances

0.7
0.8
0.8
0.9
1.1
1.3
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.8
1.8
2.0
2.0

shall apply (see

-I- 0.6 mm
- 0.2mm
Where specifically ordered, for rivets up to 33 mm diameter,

the tolerance shall be


+ 0.3 mm
- 0.1 mm
b) At positionY

+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm

c) At position Z (in case of rivets longer


than 5D, see Fig. 11)

+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm

d) Between positions X and Y

Diameter not to be greater than the maximum value at


position X nor less than the minimum value at position Y

e) Between positions Y and Z

+ 0.0 mm
- 1.0 mm

f)

Not greater than 0.4 mm within the sizes resulting from


the tolerances mentioned in (a), (b), (c), (d) and (e)

Out of roundness at any cross-section

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1928 - 1961

I
t;
3
f

cc-D4

FIG. 2 ELLIPSOID

FIG. 1 SNAP HEAD

HEAD

l--D1

i--D4
FIG.3 PAN HEAD, TYPE

4 D For Rivets under 24 mm


I:3 D For Rivets 24 mm and over

FIG. 4 PLAN

HEADITYPE

250

FIG. 5 PAN HEAD WITH TAPERED

FIG. 7 COUNTERSUNK

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

NECK

FIG. 8 ROUNDED

HEAD

FASTENERS-PART

FIG. 6 CONICAL

HEAD

COUNTERSUNK

HEAD

IS : 1928 - 1961

FIG.
FIG. 9 STEEPLE

Nominal

THAN

on the length of the rivets shall be as follows:


Tolerance

Diameter

+F5
- 0.0
+ 2.0
- 0.0
+ 2.5
- 0.0

20 to 30
Above 30
on other dimensions

6.3.1 The maximum

FIVE DIAMETERS

--+

lJpmt:*0

6.3 Tolerance

0*5D

LONG AND SHORTER

FIG. 11 RIVETS LONGER


FIVE DIAMETERS

The tolerance

10 RIVETS

HEAD

1--_4.50

6.2 Length -

,L

-04250+3

inclination

of rivets shall be as given in Table 2.


G (see Fig. 12) of the head shall not exceed two degrees

b--Ita

&
++

FIG.

7. Tests for Finished


7.1 Sampling
Note --.A

10

12 TOLERANCE

ON RIVET

HEAD

Rivets

The method of sampling shall be mutually

recommended

method

of sampling

agreed upon between the supplier and the purchaser.

is under consideration.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1928- 1961
1.2 Tests
7.2.1 Bend test - The rivet shank shall be bent cold and hammered until the two parts of the shank touch in
the manner shown in Fig. 13. There shall be no fracture on the outside of the bend.

7.2.2 Flattening test - The rivet head shall be flattened, while hot, in the manner shown in Fig. 14. The head
shall be flattened until its diameter is 2tA times the diameter.ofthe shank. There shall be no cracking at the edges.

FIG. 13 BEND TEST

FIG. 14 FLATTENING

TEST

8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of

manufacture on the head of all rivets.


8.1.1 The packages containing the rivets may also be marked with the ISI Certification Mark.
Note - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions ofthe Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance that
they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality
control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked by 1SI for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may
be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

9. General Supply Conditions


9.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 1387- 1959 General
requirements for the supply of metals and metal products.
10. Preservation and Packing
10.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of enquiry or at the time of
placing the order, the rivet shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against rust in a
manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.2 Packing -

HANDBOOK

The rivets shall be packed in accordance with the best trade practice.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS:1929 - 1982

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
HOT FORGED STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING
(12 TO 36 mm DIAMETER)
( First Revision )
l* Scope - Covers the requirements Ofhot forged solid mild steel and high tensile steel rivets for hot closing in
the diameter range 12 to 36 mm intended for general engineering purposes.
2. Material - The rivets shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS : 1148 - 1973 Specification for hot
rolled steel rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter) for structural purposes (second revision) or IS : I l49- 1982
SPeCificatiOn for high tensile steel rivet bars for structural purposes (second revision). They may also be
manufactured
from steel conforming to IS : 226 - 1969 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) Cfifth
revision), provided that the steel meets the dump test requirements
given in IS : 1IL@- 1973.
3. Dimensions -

The dimensions of rivets shall be as shown in Tables 1 to 3.

3.1 Where the rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with flat edge, the latter shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102- 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.2 The preferred nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 4.
4. Method of Manufacture - The rivets shall be made by the hot forging process and they shall be allowed to
cool gradually.
5. Acceptance Tests
5.1 General - The sampling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102- m2.
5.2 Testsfor Material - The material used in the manufacture of the rivets shall be tested as per stipulations of
the relevant material specifications indicated at 2.
5.3 Shear Test _ When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the mild steel rivets shall satisfy a
shear strength of 260 MPa and high tensile rivets a minimum shear strength of 380 MPa.

minimum

5.4 Head Soundness Test - When tested by method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982 rivets, at room temperature,
shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the fillet between the head and the shank.
6. Designation
6.1 A mild steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 16 X 70 -

IS : 1929

A high tensile steel snap head rivet of 16 mm diameter having a length of 70 mm shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 16 X 70 HT -

IS : 1929

6.2 Rivets of other types shall be designated in a similar manner.


7. Marking
7.1 All rivets shall be marked with the manufacturers trade-mark on the head in raised figure. In addition, all
high tensile steel rivets shall be marked with the raised letter HT on the head.
7.2 ZSZ Certification Mark - The bags containing the rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification
Mark.
8. General Requirements
8.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets and their workmanship shall be in accordance with
IS : 10102 - 1982.
8.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102-1982.
9. Mode of Delivery -

12

Rivets shall be packed and delivered as specified in IS : 10102 - 1982.

HANDBOOK
ONINDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

1s : 1929- 1982
TABLE

DIMENSIONS
FOR SNAP HEAD
( Cluuse 3 )
All dimensions

RIVETS

in millimetres.

Max

12
12.8

(14)
14.8

16
16.8

(18)
18.8

20
20.8

(22)
22.8

24
24.8

(27)
27.8

30
30.8

(33)
33.8

36
36.8

Min

12.0

14.0

16.0

18.0

20.0

22.0

24.0

27.0

30.0

33.0

36.0

Min

11.3

13.2

15.2

17.1

19.1

20.9

22.9

25.8

28.6

31.6

34.6

Nom

19.2

22.4

25.6

28.8

32.0

35.2

38.4

43.2

48.0

52.8

57.6

MUX

19.5s

22.8

26.1

29.3

33.2

36.4

39.6

44.4

49.2

54.0

59.0

Min

18.85

22.0

25.1

28.3

30.8

34.0

37.2

42.0

46.8

51.6

56.2

Nom
Min

8.4
9.3
8.4

9.8
10.7
9.8

11.2
12.3
11.2

12.6
13.7
12.6

14.0
15.1
14.0

15.4
16.5
15.4

16.8
17.9
16.8

18.9
20.2
18.9

21.0
22.3
21.0

23.1
24.4
23.1

25.2
26.5
25.2

Mox

0.6

0.7

0.8

019

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.5

1.7

1.8

rk

14.5

16.5

18.5

20.5

NO??l

d,

Max

9.5

11

13

22

24.5

27

30

Note 1 - The nominal diameter d shown in parenthesis are of second preference.


Note 2 - For perpendicularity tolerance value, b, see IS : 10102-1982.
Note 3 - For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
Note 4 - Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value r given.
Note 5 - The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming (see 3.1) on the head periphery
is permissible.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE 2

DIMENSIONS

FOR FLAT COUNTERSUNK

HEAD RIVETS

( Clause 3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

EDGE ROUNDED

d,

dk

Nom<
Max
Min

12
12.8
12.0

(14)
14.8
14.0

16
16.8
16.0

(18)
18.8
18.0

20
20.8
20.0

(22)
22.8
22.0

24
24.8
24.0

(27)
27.8
27.0

30
30.8
30.0

(33)
33.8
33.0

36
36.8
36.0

Min

11.3

13.2

15.2

17.1

19.1

20.9

22.9

25.8

28.6

31.6

34.6

Nom
Min

18
18.0
16.9

21
21.0
19.7

24
24.0
22.7

27
27.0
25.7

30
30.0
28.7

33
33.0
31.4

35
36.0
34.4

40.5
40.5
38.9

45
45.0
43.4

49.5
49.5
47.9

54
54.0
52.1

Ref-

5.2

6.1

6.9

7.8

8.7

9.5

10.4

11.7

13.0

14.3

15.6

MUX

(1 fY
0

60

Note 1 - The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.


Note 2 - For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.

14

N INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE 3

DIMENSIONS FOR FLAT HEAD RIVETS


( Clause 3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

--@102

I
1

IT 15/---

r
A.
t
@d,

@dl, --Od

,
I

i
--0.5d

Nom
Max

12
12.8
12.0

(14)
14.8
14.0

16
16.8
16.0

(18)
18.8
18.0

20
20.8.
20.0

(22)
22.8
22.0

24
24.8
24.0

(27)
27.8
27.0

30
30.8
30.0

(33)
33.8
33.0

36
36:8
36.0

Min

11.3

13.2

15.2

17.1

19.1

20.9

22.9

25.8

28.6

31.6

34.6

Nom

24
24.0

28
28.0

32
32.0

36
36.0

40
40.0

44
44.0

48
48.0

54
54.0

22.7

26.7

30.4

34.4

38.4

42.4

46.4

52.1

60
60.0
58.1

66
66.0
64.1

72
72.0
70.1

Min
d,

dk

Max
Min

Nom

3.0

3.5

4.0

4.5

5.0

5.5

6.0

6.75

7.50

8.25

9.6

Max
Min

3.6
3.0

4.25
3.50

4.75
4.0

5.25
4.5

5.75
5.0

6.25
5.5

6.75
6.0

7.65
6.75

8.40
7.50

9.15
8.25

9.9
9.0

Max

0.6

0.7

0.8

0.9

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.4

1.5

1.7

1.8

Note 1 - The nominal diameters in parenthesis are of second preference.


For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
For perpendicularity tolerance value, b, see IS : 10102- 1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radms under the head and shall not exceed the value, r given above.

Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 -

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1929- 1982
TABLE

DIAMETER-LENGTH

COMBINATIONS

FOR HOT FORGED

RIVETS

( Clause 3.2 )

All dimensions in millimetres.

135
140

145
150
155
~
165
170
175

~-

36.0

Note 1 Note 2 -

16

The nominal diametres in parenthesis are of second preference.


The preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

IS : 1929 - 1982
EXPLANATORY
This standard

was first published

NOTE

in 1961. In the present revision,the

following

major changes have been

made:
a)

The size range has been modified to 12 to 36 mm. The rivets in the present revision are meant for
manufacture by hot-forging only. Cold-forged rivets up to size 16 mm are being covered separately in
IS : 2155 - 1982 Specification for cold-forged solid steel rivets for hot closing (6 to 16 mm diameter)
(jkrt revision), and IS : 2998 - 1982 Specification for cold-forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to
16 mm diameter) (first revision).

b)

Bend test and flattening


more realistic.
The method
The method

HANDBOOK

test have been substituted

of closing has been indicated.


of representation
of tolerances

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

by shear test and head soundness

for form and position

has been updated.

test which are

I : 2155 - 1982

COLD

FORGED

Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
SOLID STEEL RIVETS FOR HOT CLOSING
( 6-to 16 mm DIAMETER

( First Revision )

Covers the requirements of cold forged solid steel rivets for hot closing in the diameter range 6 to
16 mm, intended for general engineering purposes.

1. Scope -

2. Material
2.1 The rivets shall be manufactured from steel conforming to IS : 7557 - 1974Specification for steel wire (up to

20 mm) for the manufacture of cold forged rivets. They may also be manufactured from steel conforming to
IS : 226 - 1975 Specification for structural steel (standard quality) (@A revision)provided that the steel meets
the dump test requirements given in 1s : 1148 - 1973Specification for hot rolled rivet bars (up to 40 mm diameter)
for structural purposes (second revision):
3. Dimensions
3.1 Dimensions of rivets shall be as shown in Tables 1 to 3.

3.2 Where rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with a flat edge, they shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102- 1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.3 The,preferred
4. Acceptance

nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 4.

Tests

4.1 General L The satipling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102 - 1982.

4.2 Test for Material - The material used for the manufacture of rivets shall be in accordance with the
stipulations of the relevant material specifications at 2.1.
4.3 Shear Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the rivets shall satisfy a minimum
shear strength of 260 MPa.
4.4 Head Soundnesr Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102- 1982, the rivets at room
te?peratilre shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of marking at the fillet between the head and the
shank.
5. Designation
5.1 A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm shall be designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 -

IS : 2155

6. General Requirements
6.1 The general requirements for the supply of rivets and their workmanship shall be in accordance with
IS : 10102- 1982.
6.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102- 1982.
7. Marking
7.1 All rivets shall be marked with the manufacturers trade-mark on the head in raised figure.

7.2 ISI Certification


Mark.

Murk -

8. Mode of Delivery -

18

The bags containing the rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification

Rivets shall be packed and delivered in accordance with IS : 10102- 1982.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUStRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2155- 1982
TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR SNAP HEAD RIVETS
( Cluuse 3. I )
All dimensions in millimetres.

t m OITl4 for d< 8


---O.Sd

1=2ITlSford>S

Nom

Max
Min

6.15
5.85

8.15
7.85

10
10.3
9.7

I2
12.3
11.7

(14)
14.3
13.7

16
16.3
15.7

d,

Min

5.82

7.76

9.4

11.3

13.2

15.2

Nom

9.6
919
9.3

12.8
13.1
12.5

16.0
16.36
15.64

19.2
19.60
18.8

22.4
22.8
22.0

25.6
26. I
25.1

8.4
8.69
8.11

9.8
10.09
9.51

11.2
11.55
10.85

dk

MUX

Min

Nom
k jMax
Min
r
rk

Max
-

Note 1 -

Note 2 Note 3 Note 4 Note 5 permissible.


Notr 6 -

4.2
4.44
3.96

5.6.
5.84
5.36

7.0
1.29
6.71

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

5.7

7.5

9.5

0.7
11

0.8
13

The nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.


For perpendicularity value b, see IS : 10102- 1982.
For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value, r given.
The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming (see 3.1) on the head periphery is
The value, h is eiven for snap design only and not intended for inspection purposes.

HANDBoOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

1.S : 2155 - 1982


TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR FLAT COUNTERSUNK


( Cluuse 3.1 )

All dimensions

HEAD

RIVETS

in millimetres.

EDGE ROUNDED
/aR
FLAT

: = NT14 for d*; 8


L = PIT15 for d > 8

Nom
Max

10
10.3
9.7

12
12.3
11.7

(14)
14.3
13.7

16
16.3
15.7

7.76

9.4

11.3

13.2

15.2

12
12
11.3

16
16
15.3

20
20
19.16

24
24
23.16

21
21
20.16

24
24
23.16

3.0

4.0

5.0

6.0

6.0

6.9

Min

6
6.15
5.85

d,

Min

5.82

dk

Nom
Max
Min

k
Ref
oc

FJ

5
0

Note 1 Note 2 -

8
8.15
7.85

j
1

600

900

The nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.


For permissible limits of shan,k diameter, see ulso IS : 10102- 1982.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2155-1982
TABLE 3

DIMENSIONS FOR FLAT HEAD RIVETS


( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

: - 4lTl4 for dC 6
I - PIT15 for d > 8

Nom
Max
h4in

d
d,

Min

12
12.3
11.7

(14)
14.3
13.7

16
16.3
15.7

7.76

9.4

11.3

13.2

15.2

20
20
19.16

24
24
23.16

28
28
27.16

32
32
31

Min

1.5
1.9
1.5

2
2.5
2

2.5
3.0
2.5

3
3.6
3

3.5
4.1
3.5

4
4.6
4

Mox

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.8

Max

Nom

5.85

10
10.3
9.7

16
16.0
15.3

Min
k

8.15
7.85

12
12.0
11.3

Nom
dk

6.15

Max

5.82

Note 1 - Nominal diameter, d in parenthesis is of second preference.


Note 2 - For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102- 1982.
Note 3 - Fdr perpendicularity tolerance value 6. see IS : 10102-1982.
Note 4 - Rivets shall be finished with a definite radius under the head and shall not exceed the value, r given.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

21

IS : 2155 - 1982

TABLE

DIAMETER-LENGTH

COMBINATIONS
(

Clause

Ail dimensions

Note 1 Note 2 -

FOR

COLD

RIVETS

FOR

HOT

CLOSING

3.3 )

in millimetres.

The nominal diametres in parenthesis is of second preference.


The preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

EXPLANATORY
This standard

FORGED

was first published

NOTE

in 1962. The following

major changes have been made in the present

revision:

a) Sizes 6 to 16 mm have been covered instead of 1.6 to 10 mm in the earlier edition. For sizes below
6 mm, IS : 2998-1982 Cold forged steel rivets for cold closing (1 to 16 mm);(should be referred. While
the manufacture
is restricted to cold forging, the method of closing by hot closing is indicated.

b)
cl

22

Bend test and flattening

test have been deleted and substituted

The method of representation


the latest practices.

of tolerances

by shear test and head soundness

for form and position

HANDBOOK

have been modified

ON INDUSTRIAL

according

test.
to

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2907 - 1964

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
NON-FERROUS
RIVETS i( i.6 TO 10 mm )

0. Foreword
0.1, This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 28 April 1964, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical Engineering
Division Council.

0.2 This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared by the Institution on metric screw threads
and fasteners. This standard deals with non-ferrous rivets, made of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium.
which are extensively used for general purposes. Mild steel and high tensile steel rivets of various sizes have been
covered in a separate standard.
b.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordace with IS : 2- 1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). I he number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard specifies the requirements of copper, tinned copper, brass and aluminium rivets of sizes 10 mm
and below, intended for general purposes.

1.2 This standard does not cover rivets for aircraft or ship-building purposes.
2. Material
2.1 The copper rivets shall be made from copper rods having a minimum copper content of 99.85 percent (silver
being counted as copper) and having a minimum tensile strength of 22 kgf/mmr.
2.2 In the case of tinned rivets, tin used for tinning the copper rivets shall be of not less than 99 percent purity.
2.3 Brass rivets shall be made from brass rods having tensile properties conforming to Alloy 1 of IS : 320 - 1962
Specification for high tensile brass rods and sections (revised).
2.4 Aluminium rivets shall be made from aluminium rivet stock conformmg to IS : 740-1956 Specification for
wrought aluminium and aluminium alloy rivets, stock (for general engineering pruposes) (since revised).
3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets shall be made by cold-forging and shall subsequently be appropriately

heat-treated, if necessary.

4. Freedom from Defects


4.1 The rivets shall be cleanly finished with heads concentric with the shanks and shall be free from
imperfections. The ends of rivets shall be square, cleanly sheared and free from rag or burr.
4.2 The tinning of tinned rivets shall be uniform and be free from spots, pin holes cracks, stams and blisters. The
tinningShall adhere firmly and be non-porous. It shall not peel off. They shall be finished smooth and bright all
over.
5. Dimensions
5.1 River Heads -

The heads of rivets shall conform to the proportions shown in Fig. I to 5.

5.2 The preferred length-diameter combinations of the rivets are given in Table 1.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

23

IS :2907-1964

FIG. 2.FLAT COUNTERSUNK

HEAD 120

FIG. 1 SNAP HEAD RIVET

FIG. 3 FLAT COUNTERSUNK

FIG. 4 FLAT HEAD RIVET

HEAD 90

FIG. 5 TOLERANCE

ON RIVET HEAD

6. Tolerances
6.1 Shank Diameter

The following table gives limiting values of shank diameter for rivets:
Shank Diameter
h

<
Nomjnal
mm
1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10
24

Maximum
mm
1.65
2.05
2.55
3.05
4.05
5.08
6.08
8.10
10.10

of Rivet
Minimum
mm
1.50
1.90
2.40
2.90
3.90
*a5
5.85
7.80
9.80
HANDBOOK

>

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2907-1964
l

TABLE 1

PREFERRED

LENGTH AND DIAMETER


FOR RIVETS
( Clause 5.2 )

COMBINATIONS

All dimensions in millimetres .


1.6

2.5

10

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X

X
-

X
X
X
X

X
X
X

9
10
12
14

X
-

16
18
20
22

X
X

24
26
28
30
35
40
45
50

55
60
65
70

_.__-.-.-

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
-

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
-

X
X

X
X

X
-

X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X indicates preferred length-diameter combination.

-.

6.2 Length -

The tolerance on the length of rivets shall be f 1.5 mm

6.3 Head Dimensions


Fig. 1 to 5).

Dimensions of heads of various types of rivets shall be as given in Tables 2 to 4 (see also

6.3.1 The maximum inclination

G (see Fig. 5) of the head shall not exceed 2O

7. Designation
7.1 Rivets conforming to this standard shall be designated by diameter, length and material.
Example:

A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter, having a length of 30 mm and made of copper, shall be
designated as:
Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 -

IS : 2907 copper

8. Tests for Finished Rivets


8.1 Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier, the methods of sampling shall be as
recommended in IS : 2614- 1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2907- 1964
8.2 Tests
8.2.1 Hatterring test - From the sample rivets selected as specified in 8.1, a specimen of a length equal to the full
diameter of the stock shall be cut from the shank. It shall be cold-flattened in an axial direction as shown in Fig. 6
until the diameter is equal to twice the original diameter. It shall not crack as a result of this test. If the rivets are
submitted to any form of heat treatment after manufacture,
the flattening test shall be performed after such
treatment.

FIG. 6 FLATTENING

TABLE 2

DIMENSIONS

TEST

OF SNAP HEAD RIVETS

( Clause 6.3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10

26

Eeccntricity

3.05
3.75
4.62
5.50
7.30
9.05
10.80
14.36
17.86

2.55
3.25
4.12
5.00
6.70
8.45
10.20
13.64
17.14

Max

luin

1.08
1.32
1.62
1.92
2.55
3.15
3.15
4.98
6.18

0.84
1.08
1.38
1.68
2.25
2.85
3.45
4.62
5.82

HANDBOOK

01 Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2907 - 1964
\
TABLE 3

DIMENSIONS

OF 120 AND 90 FLAT COUNTERSUNK

HEAD RIVETS

( Clause 6.3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

1.6
2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
10

Eccentricity
of Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
3.45
4.25
5.25
6.25
8.30
10.30
12.30
16.36
20.36

2.95
3.15
4.75
5.75
7.70
9.70
11.70
15.64
19.64

TABLE 4

0.46
0.58
0.72
0.87
1.16
1.45
1.74
2.32
2.90

0.80
1.00
1.25
1.5
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0

f
f
f
f
f
f
f
It
f

0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15

DIMENSIONS OF FLAT HEAD RIVETS


( Clause 6.3 )
AI1 dimensions in millimetres.

1.6
.2
2.5
3
4
5
6
8
IO

HANDBOOK

Eccentricity
of Head
(see Fig. 5)
e
3.45
4.25
5.25
6.25
8.30
10.30
12:30
16.36
20.36

ON INDUSTRIAL

2.95
3.15
4.15
5.15
7.70
9.70
11.70
15.64
19.64

FASTENERS-PART

0.52
0.62
0.74
0.87
I.i5
1.40
1.65
2.18
2.68

0.28
0.38
0.50
0.63
0.85
1.10
1.35
1.82
2.32

f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

0.09
0.09
0.09
0.09
0.12
0.12
0.12
0.15
0.15

27

IS :2907 - 1964
9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of

manufacture on the heads of all rivets except those having 14-mm head diameter and under.
9.1.1 The rivets may also be marked with the IS1 Certification Mark.
Note - The use of ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks) Act,
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Presence of this mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard, under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control during production. This system, which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer, has the further
safeguard that the products as actually marketed are continuously checked by IS1 for conforming to the standard. Details of conditions,

under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be granted to manufacturers or processors, may be obtained from the
Indian Standards Institution.

10. General Supply Conditions


10.1 The general requirements for ;he supply of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 1387-1959 General
fequirements for supply of metals and metal products (since revised).
11. Preservation

and Packing

11.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of enquiry or at the time of
placing the order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against corrosion
in a manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.

11.2 Packing - The rivets shall be wrapped in waterproof paper packets or in cartons, the weight of the rivets in
the packets or cartons being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases. Each
packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.

28

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2998 - 1982
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR COLD FORGED
RIVETS FOR COLD CLOSING
(1 TO 16 mm DIAMETER)
( First Revision )

STEEL

Covers the requirements of cold forged nvets, for cold closing in the diameter range 1 to 16 mm,
intended for general engineering purposes.

1. Scope -

2. Material - The rivets shall be manufactured from the following two grades or any other suitable steel
specified by the purchaser:
a)

Grade I - Steel class 1A ofIS : 18751978 Specification forcarbon steel billets, blooms, slabs and
bars for forgings Cfourth revision), and

b)

Grade 2 - Steel lOC4 of IS : 1570 (Part 2 )-1979 Schedules for wrought steels: Part 2 Carbon
steels (unalloyed steels) cfirst revision)

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions of rivets shall be as given in Tables 1 to 4.

3.2 ,Where the rivets with snap head and countersunk head are made with flat edge, they shall conform to the
values given in IS : 10102-1982 Technical supply conditions for rivets.
3.3 The preferred nominal diameter-length combinations are given in Table 5.
4. Method of Manufacture

The rivets shall be made by cold heading process and shall be suitably annealed.

5. Acceptance

Tests

5.1 General -

The sampling and acceptance criteria of the rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 10102-1982.

5.2 Testsfor Material -The material used in the manufacture of the rivets shall be tested as per stipulations of
the relevant material specification indicated under 2.
5.3 Shear Test - When tested by the method prescribed in IS : 10102-1982, the rivets shall satisfy a minimum
shear strength as follows:
Grade 1 - 230 MPa
Grade 2 - 200 MPa
5.4 Hardness Test - When tested according to IS : 1500-1968 Method for Brine11hardness test for steel Cfirst
revision), the hardness on the head of rivet shall be as follows:
Grade 1 - 48 to 73 HRB (91 to 127 VPN)
Grade 2 - 56 to 78 HRB (100 to 139 V;plv)
5.5 Head Soundness Test - When tested by method prescribed in IS : 10102-1982, the rivets at room
temperature, shall withstand the test without exhibiting any sign of cracking at the filler between the head and the
shank.

6. Designation

6.1 A snap head rivet of 6 mm diameter having a length of 30 mm and made, for example, from material Grade 1
shall be designated as:

Snap Head Rivet 6 X 30 Grade 1 -

IS : 2998

6.2 A countersunk head rivet, with a countersink angle of 90, diameter 4 mm, length 24 mm and made, for
example, from material Grade 2 shall be designated as:
Countersunk Head (90) Rivet 4 X 24 Grade 2 -

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2998

29

TABLE

DIMENSIONS
FOR SNAP
( Ciuuse 3.1 )
All dimensions

--@I

HEAD

RIVETS

in millimetres.

(0 2 IT l+EDGE ROUNDED

f = 2ITl4 for d I 8
I = 2ITl5 for d > 8

--0.5d
-

k.

l-

(1.4)
1.45
1.35

1.6
1.65
1.55

2.0
2. I
1.9

2.5
26
2.4

3.0
3. I
2.9

(3.5)
-3.6
3.4

4.0
4. I
3.9

5.0
5. I5
4.85

6.0
6,15
5.85

(7.0)
7.15
6.85

810
8.15
6.85

IO
10.3
9.7

16
16.3
15.7

6.82

7.76

9.4

15.2

16
16.36
15.64

25.6
26. I
25. I

7
7.29
6.71

II.2
Il.55
10.85

0.5

0.8

MOX
Min

1.2
1.25
I.15

ds

Min

1.13

1.33

1.52

1.87

2.37

2.87

3.37

3.87

4.82

5.82

dk

Nom
Max
Min

I .92
2. I2
1.82

2.24
2.44
2.04

2.56
2.76
2.36

5.2
3.45
2.95

4
4.25
3.75

4.8
5.05
4.55

5.6
5.85
5.35

6.4
6.65
6.15

8
8.3
7.7

9.6
9.9
9.3

Nom
Max
Min

0.84
1.04
0.64

0.98
1.18
0.78

I. I2
1.32
0192

1.4
1.6
1.2

I.75
1.95
1.55

2. I
2.3
1.9

2.45
2.65
2.25

2.8
3.0
2.6

3.5
3.74
3.34

4.2
4.44
3.96

Nom

r
*k

1.6
1.8
1.4

0.2

Max
=
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note
Note

I
1
2
3
4
5
6

~
~
-

1.2

1.4

11.2
Il.5
10.9
4.9
5.14
4.66

0.3
1.6

1.9

2.4

2.8

3.4

3.8

12.8
13.1
12.5
5.6
5.84
5.36
0.4

4.6

5.7

6.6

Nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.


For perpendicularity
tolerance value, b see IS : 10102-1982.
For permissible fimits.of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with a definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value r given.
The shape of head shall be forged into part of a sphere. Necessary flat land for trimming/( see3.1) on the head periphery
The values given for rk are meant for snap design and not for inspection purposes.

7.5

is permissible.

I3

TABLE 2

DIMENSIONS

FOR FLAT COUNTERSUNK


( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions

/--

HEAD (W/60)

RIVETS

in millimetres.

EDGE ROUNDED
OR FLAT

r = 2IT14 for d 5 8
t = 21T15 for d > 8

Nom

I
1.05
0.95

Mox
Min

1.2
1.25
1.15

(1.4)
1.45
1.35

1.6
1.65
1.55

2.0
2. I
1.9

2.5
2.6
2.4

3.0
3.1
2.9

(3.5)
3.6
3.4

4.0
4. I
3.9

5.0
5.15
4.85

d,

Min

0.93

1.13

1.33

1.52

1.87

2.37

2.87

3.37

3.87

2
2
I.75

2.4
2.4
2.25

2.8
2.8
2.65

3.2
3.2
2.9

4
4
3.7

5
5
4.7

6
6
5.7

7
7
6.64

8
8
7.64

10

dk

Nom
Max
Min

0.5

0.6

0.7

0.7

0.8

1.0

1.25

1.5

1.75

km
Ref

I
+50
0

Note 1 - Nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.


Note 2 ~- For permissible limits of shank diameter, see o/so IS : 10102-1982.

4.82

10

9.64

6.0
6. 15
5.85
5.82

(7.0)
7. 15
6.85

8.0
8. 15
6.85

10
10.3
9.7

12
12.3
11.7

l(14)
14.3
13.7

16
16.3
15.7

6.82

7.76

9.4

II.3

13.2

15.2.

12
12
II.57

14
14
13.57

16
16
15.57

20
20
19.48

24
24
23.48

28
28
27.48

32
32
31.38

2.5

3.5

5.2

6.1

6.9

t
900

60

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR FLAT COUNTERSUNK


( Clause 3.1 )
All dimensions

HEAD

(120) RIVETS

in millimetres.

EDGE ROUNDED
/-- OR FLAT

t=2IT14ford%8
r = 2IT15 for d > 8

Min

1
1.05
0.95

1.2
1.25
I. 15

(1.4)
1.45
1.35

1.6
1.65
1.55

20
2.1
1.9

2.5
2.6
2.4

3.0
3.1
2.9

(3.5)
3.6
3.4

4.0
4.1
3.9

5.0
5.15
4.85

6.0
6.15
5.85

(7.0)
7.15
6.85

8.0
8.15
7.85

10
10.3
9.7

12
12.3
11.7

Min

0.93

1.13

1.33

1.52

1.87

2.37

2.87

3.37

3.87

4.82

5.82

6.82

7.76

9.4

11.3

Nom
Max
Min

2
2
1.75

2.4
2.4
2.25

2.8
2.8
2.65

3.2
3.2
2.9

4
4
3.1

5
5
4.7

6
6
4.1

7
7
6.64

8
8
7.64

10
10
9.64

12
12
11.57

14
14
13.57

16
16
15.57

20
20
19.48

24
24
23.48

0.29

0.348

0.406

0.468

0.58

0.725

0.87

1.015

1.16

1.45

1.74

2.03

2.32

2.9

NOWI
Max

d,

dk

k
w
Ref
Note 1 Note 2 -

The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.


For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.

3.48

TABLE 4

DIMENSIONS
FOR FLAT HEAD
( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions

RIVETS

in millimetres.

t = 21T 14 for d 5 8
I = 21T 15 ford > 8

Nom
Max
Min

I
1.05
0.95

1.2
1.25
1.15

(1.4)
1.45
1.35

1.65
1.5

2
21
2.4

2.5
2.6
24

3
3. I
3.9 ,

(3.5)
3.6
3.4

4
4. I
3.9

d,

Min

0.93

1.13

1.33

1.52

1.87

2.37

2.87

3.37

3.87

Nom
Max
Min

2
2
1.75

2.4

dk

2.4
2.25

2.8
2.8
2.65

3.2
3.2
29

4
4
3.7

5
5
4.7

6
6
5.7

7
7
6.64

8
8
7.64

Nom
Max
Min

0.25
0.35
0.25

0.3
0.4
0.3

0.35
0.55
0.35

0.4
0.6
0.4

0.5
0.8
0.5

0.625
0.925
0.625

0.75
1.05
0.75

0.875
1.175
0.875

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.3

Max
Note
Note
Note
_~
Note

1
2
3
4

1.6

1.3

5
5.15
4.85

16
16.3
15.7

4.82

15.2

I
10
10
9.64

1.25
1.65
1.25

0.3

The nominal diameters, d in parenthesis are of second preference.


For permissible limits of shank diameter, see also IS : 10102-1982.
For perpendicularity
tolerance value, b see IS : 10102-1982.
Rivets shall be furnished with definite radius under the head which shall not exceed the value, r given.

32
32
23.48

27.48

31.38

IS : 2 998 - 1982
TABLE

DIAMETER-

LENGTH

COMBINATIONS
( Clotise 3.3 )

All dimensions

+g*5

ds10
0. o FOR d 0

1TOL+Y

FOR

FORGED

RIVETS

in millimetres.

NOMINAL

FOR COLD

1 1.2 (1.4) 1.6 2 2.5

DIAMETER

3 (3.5) 4

d
6 (7)

tne

(FOR REFERENa)I

Note 1 Note 2 -

~12

The nominal diameters in parenthesis are of second preference.


The preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

__.___----. ..- .-

34

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2998 - 1982
7. General Requirements
7.1 The general requirements
IS : 10102-1982.

for the supply

of rivets and their workmanship


01 $5

(I

shall be in accordance

with

+50

7.2 Limits of surface cracks on rivets shall be in accordance

with IS : 10102-1982.

8. Marking
8.1 All rivets over 5 mm diameter shall be marked with the manufacturers
in raised figure.
8.2 ZSI Certification
Mark.

Mark

9. Mode of Delivery

This standard

The bags containing

the rivets may also be marked

Rivets shall be packed and delivered

was first published

trade-mark

and a letter Con the head


with the ISI Certification

as specified in IS : 10102-1982.

in 1965. In the present

revision,

following

modifications

have been

made:
a)

Sizes 1 to 16 mm have been covered

b)

Bend test and flattening


are more realistic, and

The method

HANDBOOK

of 1.6 to 10 mm covered in the earlier edition,

test have been substituted

of representation

ON INDUSTRIAL

instead

of tolerances

FASTENERS-PART

by shear test and head soundness

for form and position

test as the latter

has been updated.


35

IS :3974 - 1967

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FORBIFURCATED
RIVETSFOR
GENERALPURPOSES
0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 January
finalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved
Engineering Division Council.
0.2 Bifurcated rivets are extensively
plastics and leather. The bifurcation

1967, after the draft


by the Mechanical

used in large quantities to fasten many types of materials such as wood,


is formed by sawing or punching out the slot from a solid riyet.

0.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calc&ted,
expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)

prescribes

the requirements

Oval-head bifurcated rivet, and


120 -countersunk
head bifurcated

for two types of bifurcated

rivets given below:

rivet.

2. Mater/al
2.1 The material for steel bifurcated rivets shall conform to C 15 of Schedule 11 of IS : l570- 1961 Schedules for
wrought steels fdr general engineering purposes. The percentage of each of sulphur and phosphorus in the steel
shall not exceed 0.05.
2.1.1 Rivets made from steel may be electroplated.
2.2 The material for aluminium
and aluminium
alloy bifurcated
rivets shall conform to IS: 740-1966
Specification
for wrought aluminium
and aluminium
alloys, rivet stock (for genera1 engineering purposes)
(revised).
2.3 The material.fol, brass bifurcated
rods and sections (revised).

rivets shall conform

to IS : 320-1962 Specification

for high tensile brass

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
4. Workmanship

for bifurcated

rivets shall be as given in Tables

1 and 2.

and Finish

4.1 The bifurcated rivets shall be well finished


bifurcation
shall be well formed.

and free from burrs and harmful

defects. The heads and the

5. Designation
5.1 The bifurcated rivets conforming
to this standard
number of this standard and the material.
5.1.1 An oval-head bifurcated rivet of nominal
made from steel, shall be designated as:
Oval Hd Bifurcated

shall be designated

size 4 mm, length 12 mm, Fonforming


,Rivet 4 X 12 -

51.2 A 120 countersunk


head bifurcated rivet of nominal
standard and made from aluminium shall be designated as:
120 CSK Hd Bifurcated
6. Preservation

by the type, nominal

to this standard

and

IS : 3974 Steel.

size 3 mm, length

Rivet 3 X 10 -

size, length,

10 mm, conforming to this

IS : 3974 Aluminium.

and Packing

6.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified a particular treatment at the time of enquiry or placing the
order, the bifurcated rivets shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and suitably protected against Corrosion.

36

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS:3974-

1967

6.2 Packing - The bifurcated rivets shall be wrapped in water-proof paper packets or cartons, the wright of the
rivets in the packet or carton being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases.
Each packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.
7. Sampling
7.1 For the purpose of conducting tests for conformity of the bifurcated rivets to this standard, the sampling
bifurcated rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.

of

,8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser
manufacture
on the heads of bifurcated rivets.
8.1.1 The bifurcated

rivets may also be marked

shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of

with the IS1 Certification

Mark.

Note - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by ISI and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by IS1 for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification
Mark may be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

9. General

Supply

Conditions

9.1 The general requirements


for the supply of bifurcated rivets shall be in accordance
General requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials ($rsr revision).

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS FOR BIFURCATED


( Cluuse 3.1 )
All dimensions

r
I (+ IT9)
3
4
5
6
.7
8
9
IO
I2
14
16
I8
_?
22
24
26
28
30
32
Note -

F--~---4

HANDBOOK

.
2
4
4
0.6
0.3

2.5
5
5
0.7
0.4

3
6
5.5
0.85
0.45

3.5
7
7
1.0
0.5

4
8
8
I.2
0.6

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

For dimensions

ON INDUSTRIAL

RIVETS

in millimetres.

Oval Head
Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D (is 13)
R Nom
h (+ IT7)

with IS: 1387-1967

X.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

4.5
9
8.3
1.3
0.7

120-Countersunk Head
5
9.5
8.5
1.3
0.75

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

5.5
IO
8.5
1.3
0.8

6
IO
8.5
I.3
0.9

X
X
X
x.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

of II, c and A see Table 2

FASTENERS-PART

37

IS : 3974 - 1967
TABLE

BIFURCATION

DIMENSIONS

( C/awe

All dimensions
d

Above

2.5

3.5

4.5

5.5

38

RIVETS

in millimetres

Length Range
c

FOR

3.1 )

Up to and *
Including

4
6
9

4
6
9
14

4
6
9

4
6
9
16

4
6
9
16

4
6
9
16
22

4
6
9
16

4
6
9
16
24

4
6
9
16

4
6
9
16
26

6
9
16

6
9
16
30

6
9
16

6
9
16
30

6
9
16

6
9
16
32

6
9
16

6
9
*I6
32

2.5
4
5.5
7
2.5
4
5.5
7
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
2.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5
4
5.5
7
12.5

4
5.5
7
12.5

HANDBOOK

0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
0.95
1.2
1.2
0.95
0.95
0.95

8%
8%
5
5
12
8%
5
5
12
I2
8%
8%
5

1.2
1.2
1.2
0.95
0.95

12

1.8
1.8
1.2
1.2
1.2

12

1.8
1.8
1.2
1.2

12

1:8
1.8
1.8
1.2

12

1.8
1.8
1.8
1.2
1.8
1.8
1.8
1.2

.ON,,INDUSTRIAL

12
8%
8%
5

12
12
12
8%

12
12
8%

12
12
8%
12
12
12
12
12
12
12
12

FASTENERS-PART

IS :4040 - 1967
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

SOLID-DRILLED

TUBULAR

FOR
AND SEMI-TUBULAR

RIVETS

3. Foreword
I.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 17 January
inalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved
Engineering Division Council.

1967, after the draft


by the Mechanical

1.2 Solid-drilled tubular and semi-tubular


rivets are extensively used in large quantities to fasten many types
naterials, such as sheet metal and die-casting. In solid-drilled tubular rivets, the rivet hole is drilled deeper;
iome cases to almost all length of the shank whereas in case of semi-tubular rivets, the hole when swaged
mtruded is generally tapered. The use of these rivets is restricted to those applications where they are subjected
ihear rather than tensile stresses or where either of these stresses is negligible.

of
in
or
to

1.3 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)

prescribes requirements

Oval head, and


120 countersunk

for solid-drilled

tubular and semi-tubular

rivets of the following types:

head.

2. Material
2.1 The material for steel rivets shall conform to Cl5 of Schedule I1 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for wrought
steels for general engineering purposes. The sulphur and phosphorus in the steel shall not exceed 0.05 percent
each.
2.1.1 Rivets made from steel may be electroplated.
2.2 The material for aluminium and aluminium alloy rivets shall conform to IS : 740-1966 Specification
wrought aluminium
and aluminium alloys, rivet stock (for general engineering purposes) (revised).
2.3 The material for brass rivets shall conform
sections (revised).

to IS : 320-1962 Specification

for

for high tensile brass rods and

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions

for solid-drilled

tubular

rivets shall be as given in Table

1.

3.1.1 The holes in the rivets are drilled up to the head or for a length of 12 mm, whichever
3.2 The dimensions

for semi-tubular

rivets shall be as given in Table 2.

3.2.1 The holes in the rivets may be made either parallel


4. Workmanship

is less.

or tapered

as given in Table 2.

and Finish

4.1 The rivets shall be well finished and free from burrs and harmful defects. The heads and the drilled holes shall
be well formed.
5. Designation
5.1 The rivets conforming to this standard
standard and the material.

shall be designated

by its name, nominal

size, length, number

of this

Examples:

a)

An oval head solid-drilled tubular rivet of nominal size 4 mm, length 12 mm and conforming
standard, and made from steel shall be designated as:
Oval Hd Tabular

b)

Rivet 4 X 12 -

to thir

IS : 4040 Steel.

A 120 countersunk
head semi-tubular rivet of nominal size 3 mm, length IO mm and conforming
this standard, and made from aluminium shall be designated as:
120 CSK Hd Semi-tubulay
3

Rivet 3 X 10 -

IS : 4040 Aluminium.

tc

IS :4040 - 1967
TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

FOR SOLID-DRILLED
( Clause 3.1 )

All dimensions

TUBULAR

RIVETS

in millimetres.

yht

-++----l-----i
Oval Head

i+----L------J
120~Countersunk Head

Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D (is 13)
R Nom
dl Nom
h (+ IT7)
; (+ IT9)
3
4
5
6
I
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
33

6. Preservation

2.5

(3.5)

4
1.0
0.6
0.3

5
1.3
0.7
0.4

5.5
1.6
0.85
0.45

7
2.2
1.0
0.5

X
X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

4
8
8
2.7
1.2
0.6

9
8.3
3
1.3
0.7

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

(5.5)

9.5
8.5
3.3
1.3
0.75

10
8.5
3.5
1.3
0.8

X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

(4.5)

X
X
X
X

6
10
8.5
3.5
1.3
0.9

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X

X
X

X
X

X
X
X

X
X
X

and Packing

6.1 Preservarion - Unless the purchaser has specified a particular treatment at the time of enquiry or placing the
order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well-cleaned condition and suitably protected against corrosion.
6.2 Packing - The rivets shall be wrapped in waterproof paper packets or cartons, the weight of the rivets in the
packet or carton being 0.5 kg. Fifty such packets or cartons shall be suitably packed in wooden cases. Each
packet, carton or wooden case shall contain rivets of one size and type only.
7. Sampling
7.1 For the purpose of conducting tests for conformity of the rivets to this standard,
be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of fasteners.

the sampling

ofrivets
shall

8. Marking
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser
manufacture
on the heads of the rivets.
8.1.1 The rivets may also be marked

shall be stamped

with the ISI Certificatisn

(raised or sunk) during

the process of

Mark.

Note - The use of the IS1 Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards lnstitution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by IS1 for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard.
Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification
Mark may be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards
Institution.

40

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :4040 - 1967
v
TABLE

DIMENSIONS
( Chuses

FOR SEMI-TUBULAR
3.2 and 3.2.1

All dimensions

l(+

IT9)
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
12
14
16
18
20
22
24
26
28
30
32

in millimetres.

k!ht-

-+b------l-----i
Nominal Size
d (is 12)
D fjs 13)
R Nom
dl Nom
h (+ IT7)
1,

RIVETS

2.5

3.5

4.5

5.5

4
4
1.6
0.6
1.6
0.3

5
5
2
0.7
2
0.4

6
5.5
2.4
0.85
2.4
0.45

7
7
2.8
1.0
2.8
0.5

8
8
3.2
1.2
3.2
0.6

9
8.3
3.6
1.3
3.6
0.7

9.5
8.5
4.0
1.3
4
0.75

10
8.5
4.5
1.3
4.5
0.8

8.5
4.8
1.3
4.8
0.9

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
-

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

10

X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X

9. General Supply Conditions


9.1 The general requirements
for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance
requirements
for supply of metallurgical
materials Cfirsr revision).

with IS: 1387-1967 General

IS :4732 - 1968

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
RIVETS FOR SHIPBUILDING
0. Forkword
0.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution
on 6 June 1968, after the draft
finalized by the Screw Threads and Fasteners Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical
Engineering
Division Council.
0.2 Each classification
society has evolved its own specifications
for materials of construction
of a ship, in
general, and ships built in India are mostly governed by the rules and requirements
of Lloyds Register of
Shipping, London.
0.3 This specification for rivets for ships structure meets the rules and requirements
of Lloyds Register
Shipping, which are being followed for the merchant ships being built in India and abroad for India.

of

0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard

prescribes

the requirements

of mild steel rivets, 16 to 33 mm in diameter,

for ships structure.

2. Material
2.1 Rivets shall be manufactured
steel rivet bars for shipbuilding.

from mild steel rivet bars, conforming

to IS : 3298-1965 Specification

for mild

3. Manufacture
3.1 Rivets may be made either by cold or hot forging. If rivets are made by the cold forging process, they shall
subsequently
be stress-relieved.
4. Freedom from Defects
4.1 Rivets shall be free from imperfections
5. Dimensions

and Tolerances

5.1 The dimensions

and tolerances

5.2 Lengrh -- The tolerance


5.3 The maximum

inclination

of rivets shall be as given in Table 1.

on the length of the rivets shall be f1.5

mm.

(see Fig. 1) of the head shall not exceed 2.

FIG. 1
5.4 Tolerance

and heavy scales. The ends of the rivets shall be cleanly sheared.

on the other dimensions

TOLERANCE

ON RIVET

HEAD

of rivets shall be as given in Table

1.

6. Designation
6.1 The shipbuilding
standard.

42

rivets shall be designated

by the type of rivet head, size, length and the number

of this

HANDBOOKONlNDUSTRlALFASTENERS-PART3

IS : 4732 - 1968
Examples:

a)

A snap head rivet of size 20 mm, length 45 mm and conforming to this standard shall be designated as:
Snap Hd Rivet 20 X 45 -

b)

IS : 4732

A countersunk head rivet of size 24 mm, length 65 mm and conforming to this standard shall be
designated as:

CSK Hd Rivet 24 X 65 -

IS : 4732

7. Tests for Finished Rivets


7.1 Rivets shall be selected for testing by the Inspector or an authorized representative and tested in his presence.

7.2 Sampling
fasteners.

The sampling of rivets shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1964 Methods for sampling of

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS FOR RIVETS FOR SHIPBUILDING


( Clauses 5.1 and 5.4 )

All dimensions in millimetres.

SNAP
Size d

COUNTERSUNK

HEAD

HEAD
Lengths

CSK Angle a

Eccentricity

Basic
Nom

To1

16

Basic

To1

25.6

Snap

CSK

11.2

To1

Max

Max

From

To

Increment
Steps

Basic

27

90

33
_~30
45

114
102
126

3
3
3

60

45

126

45

63

162

69

180

69

180

To1

0.8

+ 0.8
20
,I8
22

- 0.4
+0.8

32.0
28.8
35.2

f 0.5

14.0
126
15.4

15
12
15

-0
+ 1.2

25

16.8

20

-0

18.9

20

1.Y
v

24

38.4

27
30

43.2
+ 1.2.
- 0.4

33

f 1.2

2.0
+ 00
- 20

1.0

3.5
48.0

21.0

52.8

23.i

20.5 + 1.6
-0
20.5

3.0

35

The rivet shank shall be bent cold and hammered until the two parts of the shank touch in the
manner shown in Fig. 2. There shall be no fracture on the outside of the bend.

7.3 Bend Test -

7.4 Flattening Test - The rivet head shall be flattened, while hot, in the manner shown in Fig. 3. The head shall
be flattened until its diameter is two and half times the diameter of the shank. There shall be no cracking at the
edges.
7.5 Sulphur Print Test - Rivets shall be selected for examination by means of sulphur prints and the material
shall be free from .marked central segregation of sulphur and other non-metallic substances.
8. Marking and Certificates
8.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped (raised or sunk) during the process of

manufacture on the heads of all rivets.


HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

43

IS .: 4732 - 1968

FIG. 2 BEND TEST


8.1.1 Test and inspection

certificates

8.1.2 The *packages containing

FIG. 3 FLATTENING

from the inspection

authority

the rivets may also be marked

TEST

shall be furnished

by the supplier.

with the IS1 Certification

Mark.

Note -The
use of the ISICertification
Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards lnstitution(Certification
Marks)
Act and the Rules and Regulations niade thereunder. The ISI Mark on products covered by an Indian Standard conveys the assurance
that they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and
quality control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. IS1 marked products are also continuously checked
by ISI for conformity
to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions under which a licence for the use of the ISI
Certification
Mark may be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

9. General Supply Conditions


9.1 The general requirements
for the supply of rivets shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metals agd metal products (since revised).
10. Preservation

with IS: 1387-1959 General

and Packing

10.1 Preservation - Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of enquiry or at the time of
placing the order, the rivets shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and suitably protected against rust in a
manner which is left to the discretion of the manufacturer.
10.2 Packing -

The rivets shall be packed in accordance

with the best trade&practice.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

3
I

IS :9086- 1979

Indian Standard

UNIVERSAL

SPECIFICATION
FOR
HEAD ALUMINIUM
ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT

RIVETS

1. Scope - Covers material, dimensions, identification and other requirements for universal head aluminium
alloy rivets for use in aircraft.
2. Material
2.1 The chemical composition of the alloys shall be as given in IS : 5902 - 1970Specification for aluminium and

aluminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes. The following are the preferred grades:
Alloy No.
1

Material Grade
55 000

22 500

3.

24 530

2.2 The condition of supply, heat treatment and mechanical properties of wire used for manufacture or rivets
shall be as follows:
Cendition as Delivered to
Rivet Maker

Annealed

or

strain-hardened

Heat Treaiment to be
Given to Tensile Test

anil

None

stabilized
2

Minimum
Shear
Strength*
N/mm

270
360 luaxt

170

270

180

410

260

Annealed and cold-drawn to secure


not less than 20 percent .
Solution-treated at 495 f 5OC
and aged for not less than
4 days at room temperature

-,

Minimum
Tensil
Strength*
of Test
Sample
N/mm2

Not more than 40 percent


tion in cross-sectional area

reduc-

*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.


TMaximum value associated with maximum hardness condition.

HANDROOX ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

45

IS :9086- 1979
2.3 The condition of supply, heat treatment and mechanical properties of the rivets shall be as follows:

by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery

Condition as
Delivered

As manufactured

Solution-treated and
aged

Solution-treated and
aged for not less
than 4 days

As delivered*

As closed

None

As manufactured

Solution-treated and
closed within a
short period (for
example, 2 hours at
room temperature
unless refrigerated)

Aged (for example, not


less than 4 days at
room temperature
after closing)

1-*Rivets in alloy No. I and 2 shall not be heat-treated

after delivery.

3. Dimensions

3.1 Shank
All dimensions in millimetres.
NomInaI Diameter,

Tolerance

46

1.6

f 0.05

2.4

+ 0.06
- 0.04

3.2

f 0.05

4.0

i 0.06

4.8

+ 0.05
- 0.07

5.6

+ 0.05
- 0.07

6.4

+ 0.05
- 0.07

8.0

+ D.03
- 0.10

9.6

+ 0.03
- 0.10

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

IS :9086 - 1979
3.2 Head

x = 13 +r
Within length x, for shank diameter value may increase to d,,,,
0

+ 0.05.

Head to be concentric with shank within 0.25 mm.


All dimensions

Nominal Shank
Diameter,

1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6

in millimetres.

G
(Pef 6nly,

f0.25

3.2
4.7
6.4
1.9
9.5
Il.0
12.7
15.9
19.0

f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f
f

0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.9

0.7
1.0
1.4
1.7
20
2.4
2.7
3.4
4.1

0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
20
24

1.4
2.1
2.7
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.5
6.9
8.3

0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

4. Identification Symbols
4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or end of the shank with symbols. The symbols for the alloys No. 1
and 3 shall be embossed, having a height of approximately 0.2 mm. The indented point for alloy No. 2 shall have
a depth of approximately 0.2 mm. The symbols are shown below:
Alloy No.

Identiflc~tion Symbol

Embossed
7

Indented

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

Embossed

FASTENERS-PART

IS :9086 - 1979
4.2 The following colours
Alloy
Alloy
Alloy

may
No.
No.
No.

also be used in addition to symbols to identify the rivets;


Green
1
Violet
2
Self colour
3

5. General Requirements - Unless specified otherwise, the general requirements for rivets shall conform to
IS : 9089-1979 General requirements for rivets of aluminium and aluminium wrought alloys for aircraft.
6. Designation

Shall be designated by the rivet diameter, alloy number and number of this standard.

Example:
A universal head rivet of diameter 9.6 mm and conforming to alloy No. 2 shall be designated as:
Universal Head Rivet 9.6 Alloy 2 -

IS : 9086.

7. Packing -

As agreed between the purchaser and the supplier.

8. Marking -

All packages shall be marked with the following information:

a)
b)
c)
d)

Manufacturers name or trade-mark, if any;


Rivet designation;
Quantity; and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp.

8.1 ZSI Certification Marking -

Details available with the Indian Standards Institution.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard is one of the series of Indian Standards on rivets for aircraft use. It conforms to ISO/ DIS
3230 Aircraft aluminium alloy rivets-Basic dimensions, materials and identification symbols, issued by the
International Organization for Standardization (ISO).
48

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :9087 - 1979
1

Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
100 COUNTERSUNK
ALUMINIUM
ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT

1. Scope - Covers material, dimensions,


aluminium
alloy rivets for use in aircraft.

identification

and other requirements

RIVETS

for 100 countersunk

head

Material
1 The chemical coniposition of the alloys shall be as given in IS : 5902 - 1970 Specification for aluminium and
uminium alloy rivet stock for cold forged rivets for aircraft purposes. The preferred alloys for this standard are
i follows:
Alloy No.

Material Grade

55 000

22 500

24 530

2 The condition of supply, heat treatment


la11 be as follows:
Alloy
No.

Condition as Delivered
Rivet Maker

and mechanical

to

properties

Heat Treatment to be
Given to Tensile Test
Sample

*
I

I
3

Annealed or strain-hardened
stabilized
Annealed
secure

and cold-drawn

Minimum
Tensile
Stren#b*
of Test
Sample,
N/mm2

to

None

270
360 IWaxt

None

270

I-

I
Solution-treated at 495 f 5O C
and aged for not less than
4 days at room tempera-

410

260

-.
*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.
tMaximum value associated with maximum hardness condition.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

of rivets

and

Not less than 20 percent and not


more than 40 percent reduction
in cross-sectional area

of wire used for manufacture

FASTENERS-PART

I
49

IS :9087 - 1979
2.3 The condition of supply, heat treatment. and mechanical properties of the rivets shall be as follows:
Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery

Alloy
No.

Condition as
Delivered

Condition at the
Time of Closing

Condition

When in

Use

As manufactuced

As delivered*

As closed

Solution-treated and
aged

Solution-treated and
aged for not less
than 4 days

As delivered+

As closed

None

As manufactured

Solution-treated and
closed within a
short period (for
example, 2 hours at
room temperature
unless refrigerated)

Aged (for example, not


less than 4.days at
room temperature
after closing)

--

*Rivets in alloy No. 1 and 2 shall not be heat-treateo alter delivery.

3.. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions in millimetres
Nominal Diameter,
d

1.6

f 0.05

2.4

+ 0.06
- 0.04

3.2
4.0

50

Tolerance

f 0.05
f 0.04
- 0.06

4.8

+ 0.03
- 0.07

3.6

+ 0.03
- 0.07

-6.4

+ 0.03
- 0.07

8.0

+o
+ 0.10

9.6

+ 0.03
__- 0.10

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRtAL FASTENERS-PART

IS : 9087- 1979
3.2 Head

OP

x = 1.3 i- r i- B, where B is the height of the head.


Within length x, the shank diameter value may increase to d,,,
Head to be concentric with shank within 0.25 mm.

+ 0.05.

All dimensions in millimetres.


A

Nominal Shank
Diameter

1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6

3.3 Flushness

Max

Min

3.00
4.65
5.80
7.35
9.05
10.65
12.20
14.45
17.70

2.80
4.45
5.60
7.15
8.85
10.45
12.00
14.25
17.50

C
IRef Only)

(Ref 6nly)

0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

Tolerance

Flushness

tolerance

P,,,,, -

Pmi.

where
p

max=Am, - N x cot 50
2

mm

= Amin2

x cot 500

where
N is the gauging diameter,
A is the head diameter.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

and

FASTENERS-PART

51

IS : 9087 - 1979
3.3.1

All dimensions
Nominal Shank
Diameter, d

Protrusion, P

Gauge Diameter,
N
-

1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6

4. Identification

in millimPtres.

2.465
3.837
4.875
6.170
7..570
8.890
10.180
12.200
14.940

Flushness
Tolerance

Max

Min

0.224
0.320
0.388
0.516
0.642
0.717
0.805
0.925
1.158

0.140
0.236
0.304
0.432
0.558
0.633
0.721
0.839
1.074

0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084
0.084

Symbols

4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or end of the shank with symbols. The symbols for the alloys No. l
and 3 shall be embossed, having a height of approximately
0.2 mm. The indented point for alloy No. 2 shall have
a depth of approximately
0.2 mm. The symbols are shown below:

4.2 The following

corours may also be used in addition


Alloy No. 1
Alloy No. 2
Alloy No. 3

52

to symbols

to identify

the rivets:

Green
Violet
Self colour
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :9087 - 19,79
5. GeneralRequirements
- Unless specified otherwise, the general requirements
for rivets shall conform to
IS : 9089-1979 General requirements
for rivets of aluminium and aluminium wrought alloys for aircraft.
6. Designation

Shall be designated

by the rivet diameter,

alloy number

and number

of this standard.

Example:
A 100 countersunk

head rivet of diameter

100Countersunk
7. Packing

8. Marking
a)
b)
c)
d)

As agreed between
All packages

Head Rivet 6.4 Alloy 3 -

the purchaser

shall be marked

64 mm, material

alloy No. 3 shall be designated

as:

IS : 9087.

and the supplier.

with the following

information:

Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
if any,
Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp.

8.1 ISZ Certljhztion

Marking -

Details available

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

This standard is one of the series of Indian Standards on rivets for aircraft use. It conforms to ISO/ DIS
3230 Aircraft Aluminium alloy rivets-Basic
dimensions, materials and identification
symbols, issued by the
International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO).
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

53

IS :9088 - 1979
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
UNIVERSAL HEAD NICKEL ALLOY
FOR AIRCRAFT.

Scope - Covers material,


vets for use in aircraft.

dimensions,

identification

and other requirements

RIVETS

for universal

head nickel alloy

Material
1 The preferred

chemical

composition

for nickel alloys used for rivets shall be as given below:

Element

Composition,
Alloy No.

CU
Si
Fe
Mn
Cr
Al
C
s
co
Ti

28 to 34
SO.5
9.5
0.3 to 2.0
-

N;

Remainder

Percent

Alloy No. 2
3.5.
51.0
15.0
II .o
18.0 to 21 .o

SO.5
10.16
SO.024
-

2 The condition
of supply, heat treatment
vlets shall be as given below:

0.08 to 0.15
10.5
0.2 to 0.6
Remainder

and mechanical

properties

of rivet wire used for manufacture

Alloy No.

Condition as
Delivered to
Rivet Maker

Heat Treatment
for Tensile
Test Sample,
N/mm

Minimum*
Tensile
Strength of
Test Sample,
N/mm

Minimum*
Shear Strength
N/mm

Annealed
Annealed

None
None

490
650

350
450

of

*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.

3 The condition

Alloy
No.

1
2

of supply, heat treatment,

Minimum
Tensile
Strength* of
Test Sample,
N/mm
490
650

Minimum
Shear
Strengtht
N/mm

350
450

mechanical

properties

of rivet shall be as given below:

Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before
Delivery

Condition
as Delivered

Condition at
the Time of
Closing

Condition
When in
Use

Annealed

As manufactured

As delivered

As closed

As manufactured

As delivered

As closed

None

*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTFNERS-PART

IS :9088 - 1979
3. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions

in millimetres.

Nomihel Diameter. d

Tolerance

1.6

f 0.05

2.4

+ 0.06
- 0.04

3.2

f 0.05

4.0

f 0.06

4.8

f 0.05
- 0.07

5.6

+ 0.05
- 0.07

6.4

+ 0.05
- 0.07

8.0

+ 0.03
- 0.10

9.6

+ 0.03
-0.10

3.2 Head
-E-

SHARP

EDGE

REMOVED
1
r

-+lx = 113+ r
Within length x the shank diameter value may increase to d,,,, + 0.05.
All dimensions
Nominal Shank
Diameter

c
(ReI 6nIy)

+ 0.25

d
3.2
4.7
6.4
7.9
9.5

1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6

HANDBOOK

in millimetres.

f
f
f
f
f

11.0 f
12.7 f
15.9 f
19.0 f

ON INDUSTRIAL

0.7
1.0
1.4
1.7
2.0
2.4
2.7
3.4
1.4

0.15
0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.6
0.8
0.9

FASTENERS-PART

0.4
0.6
0.8
1.0
1.2
1.4
1.6
20
2.4

1.4
2.1
2.7
3.4
4.2
4.9
5.5
6.9
8.3

0.15
.0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
9.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

IS :9088

- 1979

4. Identification
4.1 The rivets shall be marked on the head or on the end of the shank with symbols as indicated below:
Alloy NG.

-7

identiflcat~oa Symbol

0.8mm

mar,.

Indented

0*8mm max.

Indented

4.2 Identification

symbols shall have the depth of approximately 0.2 mm.

5. Designation
standard.

Shall be designated by the rivet diameter, length, material alloy number and number of this

Example:
A universal head rivet of diameter 8 mm, length 10 mm, material alloy No. 1 and conforming to this
standard shall be designated as:
6. Packing -

Universal Head Rivet 8 X 10 Alloy 1 As agreed to between the purchaser and the supplier.

7. Marking -

All packages shall be marked with the following information:

a)
b)
c)
d)

Manufacturers name or trade-mark,


Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors stamp

7.1 ZSI Certjjication Marking -

IS : 9088

Details available with the Indian Standards Institution.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard ii one of the series of Indian standards on aircraft rivets. This standard conforms to
lSO/ DIS 3229 Aircraft-Nickel
the International
Organization

56

alloy rivets-Basic
for Standardization

dimensions,
(ISO).

materials

HANDBOOK

and identification

ON INDUSTRIAL

symbols, issued by

FASTENERS-PART

1s :9093 - 1979

Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
100 COUNTERSUNK
NICKEL ALLOY
RIVETS FOR AIRCRAFT
1. Scope aircraft.

Covers material,

dimensions,

identification

and other requirements

for nickel alloy rivets for use in

2. Material
2.1 The preferred

chemical

composition

for nickel alloys shall be as below:

Element

Composition,

CU
Si
Fe
Mn
Cr
Al
C
S
co
Ti
Ni

Alloy No.

_
Altoy No. 2

20 to 34
5 0.5
52.5
0.3 to 2.0
-

IO.5
I 1.0
I 5.0
5 1.0
18.0 to 21.0
-

IO.5
lo.16
5 0.024

0.08 to 0.15

5 0.5
0.2 to 0.6
Remainder

Remainder

2.2 The conditions of supply, heat treatment


rivets shall be as given below:

i_

Percent

Alloy No. 1

and mechanical

characteristics

of the wire used for manufacture

Minimum*
Shear Strength,

Condition as
Delivered to
Rivet Maker

Heat Treatment
to be Given to
Tensile Test
Sample

Minimum*
Tensile
Strength of
Test Sample,
N/mm

Annealed

None

490

350

Annealed

None

650

450

*Tensile strength and shear strength are included as alternatives.

~-

-, ___- _-

of

N/mm

.--

3. Dimensions
3.1 Shank
All dimensions
Nominal

Shank Diameter,

Tolerances

ON INDUSTRIAL

on Shank Diameter

1.6

f 0.05

2.4

-I- 0.06
- 0.04
* 0.05

3.2

HANDBOOK

in millimetres.

4.0

+ 0.04
- 0.06

4.8

+ 0.03
- 0.01

5.6

-I- 0.03
- 0.07

6.4

-I- 0.03
- 0.07

8.0

+o
- 0.10

9.6

+o
- 0.10

FASTENERS-PART

57

IS :9093 - 1979
3.2 Head

Countersunk
dav + 0.5.

head x = 1.3 t r + B, where

B is the height of the head. Within length x, the shank diameter

All dimensions
Nominal
Diameter
1.6
2.4
3.2
4.0
4.8
5.6
6.4
8.0
9.6

A
1

Mux

3.00
4.60
5.80
1.35
9.05
10.65
12.20
14.45
17.70

value may increase to

in millimetres.

Min

B
(Ref Only)

C
(Ref Only)

Flushness
Toleraince

(Ref 6nly)

2.80
4.45
5.60
7.15
8.85
10.45
12.00
14.25
17.50

0.6
0.9
1.1
1.4
1.8
2.1
2.4
2.7
3.4

o.is
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

0.10
0.10
0.13
0.13
0.15
0.18
0.18
0.20
0.23

0.15
0.15
0.15
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25
0.25

3.3 Flushness Tolerances - Suitable gauge shall be used for measuring the head flushness.
the head flushness with respect to the metal skin line shall be as specified in 3.2.

The tolerances

for

4. Identification
4.1 The rivets shall be marked
Alloy No.

on the head or on the end of the shank with symbols

as indicated:

Identification Symbol

0.8mm

max.

Indented

.oi

0.8mm

max.
Indented

4.2 The symbols


5. Designation -

58

shall have a depth of approximately


Shall be designated

0.2 mm.

by the rivet diameter,

material alloy number and number of this standard.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERSAPART

1s : 9093 - 1979
Example:
A 100 countersunk
rivet of diameter
Standard shall be designated as:

6.4 mm, material alloy No. 2 and conforming

Rivet 6.4 Alloy 2 -

to this Indian

IS : 9093

6. General Requirements
6.1 The condition

of supply,

Alloy No.

heat treatment,

mechanical

Heat Treatment
by Rivet Maker
Before Delivery

Condition 88
Delivered

Annealed
None

properties

As manufactured
As manufactured

of the rivets shall be as given below:

Condition
at the Time
of Closing

Condition
When in Use

As delivered
As delivered

As closed
As closed

6.2 General requirements for rivets, if not specified in this specification,


General requirements
for rivets of aluminium
and aluminium
wrought
7. Packing

8. Marking a)
b)
c)
d)

As agreed between the purchaser


All packages

shall be marked

and the supplier.

with the following

Manufacturers
name or trade-mark,
Rivet designation,
Quantity, and
Particulars of Inspector or Inspectors

8.1 Z,SZCertification Marking -

shall be as specified in IS : 9089-1979


alloys for aircraft*.

Details available

EXPLANATORY

information:

stamp.
with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

This standard is one of the series of standards on aircraft rivets. In the preparation
of this standard,
assistance has been derived from SP 87 and SP 88-1959 loo0 countersunk head high nickel-copper alloy rivets
issued by the British Standards Institution. This standard generally conforms to ISO/DIS 3229 Aircraft-Nickel
alloy rivets-Basic
dimensions, materials and identification symbols, issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization
(ISO).
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

59

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION B
Pins

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Indian

Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR SPLIT PINS

( Second

1. Scope

Prescribes

requirements

ReviSion )

size 0.6 to 20 mm.

for split pins of nominal

2. Nomenclature
2.1 Nominal Length (l) - The nominal
short leg (see also Appendix A)
2.2 Nominal Size -

The nominal

length is the distance from underside

size is the diameter

of the eye to the extreme end of the

of the hole for receiving

the split pins.

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
3.2 The preferred

length-size

3.3 The permissible


4. Material -

of the split pins shall be as given in Table 1.


combinations

tolerances

shall be as given in Table 2.

on the dimensions

Unless otherwise

specified,

shall be as indicated

in Table

split pins shall be manufactured

1.

from half round

mild steel wires.

5. Finish - Split pins shall be supplied with bright selfcolour finish, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
The end of each leg may be square or bevelled as shotin in figure given in Table I at the option of the
manufacturer
and shall be free from burrs.
6. Designation
6.1 A split pin shall be designated
(for other than steel only).
Example 1:
A split pin of nominal
Example 2:
A spltt pm of nominal
7. Shank -

by the nominal

length, the number of this standard

and material

size 5, nominal length 50 mm and made of steel, shall be designated


Split Pin 5 X 50 - IS : 549
size 10, nominal length 80 mm and made of brass, shall be designated
Split Pin 10 X 80 - IS : 549 - Brass

The shank shall be straight

8. Sampling - Sampling
threaded fasteners.

size, nominal

and acceptance

with both legs parallel


criteria shall conform

throughout

the nominal

as:

as:

length.

to IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling

non-

9. Test - The samples selected for test, when cold, shall permit half the length of both the legs being bent back
through l&O0 and closed flat upon themselves without showing any sign of fracture.
10. Packing -

Split pins shall be packed in cartons


Nominal Diatneler
M?n

Up to and including
2.5, 3.2 and 4
5 and 6.3
8 and IO
13, 16 and 20

Packages

and/or

wooden

FASTENERS-PART

as specified below:

Quanfity in
Each Carton/ Wooden Box
(Numbers)

1000

500
200
100
50

shall be made in such a way that they are protected

I-IANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

boxes with quantity

against

mechanical

damage

in transit.

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

OF SPLIT

PINS

( CIuuses 3.1 and 3.3 )


.Ali dimenstons

in millimetres.

Min
b

1 a

0.8

0.8

0.8

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.2

1.6

2.0

2.0

2.0

2.4

3.2

6.4

Max

I .4

1.8

2.8

3.6

4.6

5.8>

1.4

9.2

Il.8

Mitl

0.9

1.2

1.6

1.7

2.4

3.2

5.1

6.5

10.3

IO

12.6

il
39
23
29

* For railway applications

and in cases where split pins in clevis pins are subjected to alternating

transverse

forces, it is recommended

to use the next large

split pin size to that specified in the above table.

IS : 549.- 1974
TABLE

PREFERRED

LENGTH-SIZE

COMBINATION

( Clause 3.2 )
All dimensions

Note -

in millimetres.

Sizes between the bold lines are preferred.

11. earking - Each carton shall be labelled with the manufacturers


of contents, particulars of quantity and size of split pins.
11.1 ISZ Certification Marking -

Details available

name or initials or trade-mark,

with the Indian

APPENDIX

Standards

description

Institution,

( CZause 2.1 )
SPLIT
A-l. Length Gauge below:

PIN LENGTH

GAUGE

The lengths of the split pins may be determined

PERMISSIBLE
BREAK
ON GAUGE 0.10

by means of a split pin gauge as illustrated

HOLE
I&t

I PIN

This standard is in full agreement in regard to dimensions with ISO/R


series, issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

1234-1971 Split pins-Metric

65

IS -: 2393 - 19Ii-h
--1_1

__--

r-Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR CYLINDRICAL

PINS

( Second Revision )
1. Scope -

Covers the requirements

2. Dimensions

for unhardened

cylindrical

pins in the diameter

range 1.5 to 50 mm.

and Tolerances

2.1 The dimensions and tolerances


combinations
as in Table 2.
2.2 The ends of the cylindrical

for cylindrical

pins shall be as given in Table 1 and preferred length-diametet

pins shall be as specified in Table


TABLE 1

1.

DIMENSIONS FOR CYLINDRICAL


( clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 5. I )

PINS

Odh8-

---

--A

a--l-L-

---b-C

All

d m6/h8/hll

Nom

1.5

2.5

-4-L-C

C-4-L

dimensions in millimetres.

EJ

0.2

0.25

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.63

0.8

0.3

0.35

0.4

0.5

0.63

0.8

1.2

1.6

10

12

1.2
2

16

20

25

30

40

50

1.6

2.5

6.3

2.5

3.5

6.3

3. Material - Cylindrical pins,conforming


to the standard shall be manufactured
from steel of grade C30 c
IS : 5517-1972 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering or any other suitable steel with a minimur
tensile strength of 500 N/mm*. At the request of purchaser, pins may also be supplied from free-cutting steel
conforming to IS : 443 l- 1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting steels yirst revision)
4. Designation
4.1 Cylindrical
pinsshallbe designated
the number of this standard.

by name, nominal

diameter,

tolerance

on diameter,

nominal

length anI

Example:
A cylindrical pin of nominal
designated as:

diameter

Cylindrical

66

10 mm, tolerance

h8 and nominal

length 20 mm shall b

Pin 10 h8 X 20 IS : 2393

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2393 - 1980
5. Workmanship

and Finish

5.1 All pins shall be fee from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface finish of the various
shown in figures in Table 1.

faces shall be as

6. Packing
6.1 The pins may be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.

of 10,20,50

or 100. The size and quantity

shall be

7. Marking
7.1 ISZ Certi$cation Marking -

TABLE

Details available

PREFERRED

with the Indian

LENGTH-DIAMETER

Standards

Institution.

COMBINATIONS

( Clause 2.1 )
All dimensions

Note 1 i
Note 2 -

in millimetres.
DIAMETER

Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.


For lengths above 200 mm, steps of 20 mm may be used.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was originally issued in 1963 and revised in 1972. In the revision of 1972, only unhardened
cylindrical pins were covered while requirements
of hardened cylindrical pins and taper pins are covered in
IS : 6689-1972 and IS : 6688-1972 respectively.
In the earlier version, tolerance values given after rounding off to the second place of decimal had posed
certain manufacturing
problems as the manufacturer
could not take advantage of the specified tolerance class
owing to the rounding off which restricted the actual tolerance available for manufacture.
Hence, tolerance
values have been deleted and only tolerance classes retained.
In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from IS0 2338-1972
unhardened
- metric series issued by International
Organization
for Standardization.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Parallel

pins,

67

IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982


Indian

SPECIFICATION

Standard

FOR THREADED

PART

1 WITH

INTERNAL

/ First Revision
Scope 1 mm.

Covers the requirements

Dimensions

of threaded

TAPER

PINS

THREADS
)

taper pins with internal

threads

in the diameter

range 6 to

and Tolerances

1 The dimensions
2 The preferred

and tolerances
length-diameter

for internal

threaded

combinations

taper pins shall be as given in Table

for internal

threaded

1.

taper pins are given in Table 2.

3 The taper on the diameter of the taper pins shall be 1 : 50. The cone angle tolerance shall be AT8 for internal
neaded taper pins (see IS : 7615-1975 System of cone tolerances),
4 Screw threads on internal threaded taper pins shall conform to tolerance class 6H of IS : 4218 (Part 4)-1976
pecification for IS0 metric screw threads : Part 4 Tolerancing system (first revision).
Material ~- Threaded taper pins shall be manufactured
from steel with minimum tensile strength of
)O N / mm2 such as C30 of IS : 55 17-1978 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst revisionjor
ee cutting steels conforming to IS : 4431-1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting
eel Cfimt revision).
TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND

TOLERANCES

FOR INTERNAL

THREADED

TAPER

PINS

( Clauses 2. I and 5 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

ENLARGED

DETAIL

AT X
I

Nom

Diameter

10

12

l4

16

20

25

30

40

u=
dz
d3
11
12 h4in

t3

68

50
I

d, MO
0.8
M4
4.3

I
M5
5.3

1.2
M6
6.4

1.6
M8
8.4

10

12

10

12

16

20

1.2

1.2

1.2

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982


TABLE

PREFERRED

LENGTH-DIAMETER

COMBINATIONS

FOR INTERNAL

THREADED

TAPER

PINS

( Clause 2.2 )
All dimensions

in millimetres

NOMINAL

Note -

Preferred

lengths are between

4. Designation
- Threaded
number of standard.

the stepped

DIAMETER

dl

lines.

taper pins shall be designated

by name, nominal

diameter,

nominal

length and

Example:
An internal threaded
be designated as:

taper pin of nominal

Internal

Threaded

diameter,

dr = 12 mm and nominal

Taper Pin 12 8 80 -

length I= 80 mm shall

IS : 3524

5. Workmanship and Finish -Threaded


taper pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface
finish of the various faces shall be as shown in figure in Table 1.
6. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners (j&w revision) except the major and minor defects (see 6.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 6.2).
6.1 The major and minor defects shall be as given below:

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

69

IS : 3524 (Part 1) - 1982


6.2 The AQL values for testing for defectives

and defects shall be as given below:

A QJ- Values

Percent

Testing for Defectives

Testing for Defects

Major defect
Minor defect

1.5

1.5

7. General Requirements - As given in IS : 1367 (Part I)-1980 Technical supply conditions


fasteners:

Part 1 Introduction

7.1 For extraction

of internal

and general information

threaded taper pins, it is recommended

8. Packing - As given in IS : 1367 (Part 18)-1979 Technical


Part 18 Marking and mode of delivery (second revision).
9. ISI Certification

Marking

Details available

with the Indian

a)

b)
c)
d)
e)

Standards

for threaded

steel fasteners:

Institution.

NOTE

Threaded taper pins are used in application where frequent


The pins are threaded internal to provide easy withdrawal.
was first published

steel

that screws of property class 10.9areused.

supply conditions

EXPLANATORY

The standard
revision:

for threaded

(second revision)

in 1966. The following

dismounting

of the joined parts is required.

major changes have been made in the present

Standard has been split into two parts:


Part 1 Threaded taper pins with internal threads
Part 2 Threaded taper pins with external threads
Material clause has been modified to permit free-cutting steels with improved machinability.
Tolerance on the screw threads have been modified to align with IS : 4218 - 1976 Specification for
IS0 metric screw threads.
Tolerance on nominal length has been modified to js 15.
For acceptance criteria, major and minor defects have been redefined and AQL values incorporated.
AQL values are separately given for testing for defects and defectives. Thus either testing for
individual defects or defectives (the latter only distinguishes
between good and defective pieces
regardless of the various possible defects) is necessary depending on the use to which the pins are put
to. Both methods of acceptance on the basis of defect or defective pieces are therefore included as
option. There is no clear-cut statistical connection between the AQL values for individual defects and
AQL values for defective pieces.
. . _- ____
For taper tolerance, for concept of cone angle tolerance has been introduced as covered In IS : 7613 1975 System of cone tolerances.

Cylindrical

pins with internal

threads

are covered in IS : 10248- 1982.

In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from DIN 7977- 1977 Kegelstifte mlt
Gewindezapfen
und konstanten
Zapfenlangen
(Taper pins with thread and constant threaded part) and DIN
7978 - 1977 Kegelstifte mit Innengewinde
(Taper pins with internal thread), issued by the Deutsches Institut fi.ir
Normung.

7n

HANDBOOK

ON JNDUSTRJAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3524 (Part 2) - 1982


-

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR THREADED

PART 2 WITH EXTERNAL

TAPER

PINS

THREADS

/ First Revision )

1. Scope 50 mm.

Covers the requirements

2. Dimensions

of threaded

taper pins with external

threads in the diameter

range 5 to

and Tolerances

2.1 The dimensions


2.2 -The preferred

and tolerances
length-diameter

for external

threaded

combinations

taper pins shall be as given in Table

for external

threaded

taper pins arc given in Table 2.

of taper pins shall be 1 : SO. The cone angle tolerance

2.3 The taper on the diameter


threaded taper pins.

1.

shall be AT 10 for external

2.4 Screw threads on external threaded taper pins shall conform to tolerance class 6g of IS : 42 18 (Part 4)-l 976
Specification for IS0 metric screw threads : Part 4 Tolerancing
system (first revision).

3. Material

- Threaded taper pins shall be manufactured


from steel with minimum tensile strength of
500 N/ mm2 such as C30 of IS : 55 I7- 1978 Specification for steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst revision) or
free cutting steels conforming to IS : 4431-1978 Specification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting
tee1 (first reikion).

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND

TOLERANCES
All dimensions

REMOVE

SHARP

FOR

EXTERNAL

THREAD

EDGE

THREADED

TAPER

PINS

in millimetres.

END
TO

HDP

ACCORDING

1s:1+

Y-

N 11
d

Nom Diw

14

18

22

4.5

5.3

M6

M8

MI0
1

10

12

14

16

20

25

30

40

50

24

21

30

35

35

40

46

58

70

1.5

10.5

12

Ml2

Ml2

Ml6

Ml6

M20

M24

M30

M36

1.6

1.6

1.6

2.5

2.5

d, h10
+ 2P
b

a Max
dz
r2 Note -

2.4
M5
0.6
A chamfer

0.6
be provided

0.6

on the bigger end of the taper to about

1 mm length.

_____-.._

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

71

IS : 3524

(Part

TABLE 2

2) - 1982

PREFERRED

LENGTH-DIAMETER

COMBINATIONS

FOR EXTERNAL

THREADED

TAPER

PINS

( Clause 2.2 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

dl

Note 1 -. For lengths beyond 360 mm, steps of 40 mm may be used.


Note 2 - Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

4. Designation

number

- Threaded
of standard.

taper pins shall be designated

by name, nominal

diameter,

nominal

length and

Example:
An external threaded taper pin of nominal
be designated as:
External

Threaded

diameter, do = 10 mm and nominal

Taper Pin 10 X 100 -

length I= 100 mmshall

IS : 3524 (Part 2)

5. Workmanship and Finish - Threaded taper pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface
finish of the various faces shall be as shown in figure in Table 1.
6. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614-1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners Cfirst revision) except the major and minor defects (see 6.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 6.2).
6.1 The major and minor defects shall be as given below:
Minor Defect

Major Defect
Nominal

diameter,

d,

Nominal
Thread

Taper
Thread

limits

length, I
length, b

Surface finish

6.2 The AQL values for testing for defectives

and defects shall be as given below:

A QL Values, Percent
Testing for Defectives

Testing for Defects


1 Maior defect
Minor defect

12

1.5

1.5
4

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

I
I

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3524 (Part 2) -1982


7. General Requirelnents - As given in IS : I367 (Part 1)-1980 Technical supply conditions
fasteners: Part 1 Introduction
and general information
(second revision).
8. Packing
AS given in IS : 1367 (Part lSj-1979 Technical
Part 18 Marking and mode of delivery (second revision).
9. IS1 Certification

Marking -

Details

available

supply conditions

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

was first published

for threaded

steel

steel fasteners:

Institution.

NOTE

Threaded taper pins are used in applications where frequent


The pins are threaded external to provide easy withdrawal.
The standard

Standards

for threaded

in 1966. The following

dismounting

of the joined parts is required.

major changes have been made in the present

revision:
a)

The standard

has been split into two parts:

Part 1 Threaded
Part 2 Threaded

taper pins with internal threads


taper pins with external threads

b)

Material

c)

Tolerance
threads.

d)

Thread end of taperpinswith external


threads has been referred to lS : 1368 - 1980 Dimensions
ends of bolts and screws (second revision).

e)

Tolerance

f)

For acceptance criteria, major and minor defects have been redefined and AQL values incorporated.
AQL values are separately given for testing for defects and defectives. Thus either testing for
individual
defects or defectives (the latter only distinguishes
between good and defective pieces
regardless of the various possible defects) is necessary depending on the use to which the pins are put
to. Both methods of acceptance on the basis of defects or defective pieces are therefore included as
option. There is no clear-cut statistical connection between the AQL values for individual defects and
AQL values for defective pieces.

g)

For taper tolerance, the concept of cone angle tolerance


1975 System of cone tolerances.

Cylindrical
threads.

clause has been modified


on the screw threads

on nominal

to permit

free-cutting

have been modified

length has been modified

pins with internal

threads

are covered

steels with improved

machinability.

to align with IS : 4218 - 1976 IS0 metric screw


for

to js 15.

has been introduced

as covered in IS : 7615

in IS : 10248- 1982 Cylindrical

pins with internal

In the nreparation
of the standard, assistance has been derived from DIN 7977-1977 Kegelstifte mit
Gewindezapfen
und konstanten
Zapfenlangen
(Taper pins with thread and constant threaded part) and DIN
7978-1977 Kegelstifte mit Innengewinde
(Taper pins with internal thread), issued by the Deutsches lnstitut fiir
Normung.
HANDBOOKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
73

1s :4981- 1984
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
GUIDE PJNS FOR FOUNDRY PATTERN
( Second Revision )

PLATES

0. Foreword
0.1 This Indian Standard (Second Revision) was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 31 May 1984,
after the draft finalized by the Foundary Sectional Committee had been approved by the Structural and Metals
Division Council.
0.2 This standard was first issued in 1968 and was subsequently
revised in 1975. On the basis of experience
gained during these years, it has been decided to revise this standard to make it more practicable. In this revision,
the material requirement and dimensions of the guide pins have been modified.
0.3 Guide pins are fixed in the pin holes of the pattern plate by means of washers, spring washers, nuts or lock
nuts to superimpose the moulding boxes.
0.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
value, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS: 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
rounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard

covers the requirements

for guide pins for foundry

pattern

plates.

2. Supply of Material
2.1 General
requirements

requirements
relating to the supply of guide pins shall conform
for the supply of metallurgical
materials (first revision).

to IS : 1387-1967 General

3. Material

3.1 (;uidc pins shall be machined from steel conforming to class I A of IS : 1875 and shall be case carborized,
hardened and tempered to 40 45 HRC and the case depth shall be maintained at 0.25 mm. Min.

3.1.1 Higher hardness of the pin may also be supplied if agreed to between the manufacturer

and the user.

4. Shape and Size


4.1 The shape and sizes of guide pins shall be in accordance

with Tables

I and 2

5. Screw Threads
5.1 As indicated in the figures given in Tables I and 2, the left-hand end of the pin shall be threaded. The threads
shall conform to IS : 4218 (Part 3)-1976 IS0 metric screw threads : Part 3 Basic dimensions fordesign profile
(/ir.sr re\~i.sion).
6. Designation

6.1 Guide pin (A) for round holes shall be designated by the nominal diameter(dl) and nominal length (11)of the
pin. For example, a guide pin of nominal diameter 22 mm and nominal length 135 mm shall be designated as
guide pin (A) 22 X 135 -- IS : 4981.
6.2 Guide pin (B) for elongated bush holes shall be designated by the nominal width across flat (br) and nominal
length (I,) of the pin. For example, a guide nin of nominal width across flat 22 mm and nominal length 175 mm
shall be designated as guide pin (B) 22 X 175 -. IS : ~$981.
7. Workmanship

and Finish

7.1 All guide pins shall be made cleanly and neatly and shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks.
8. Packing
8.1 The guide pins may be packed in cartons or boxes with a coating of suitable rust preventive,
IO, 20, 50 or 100. The size and quantity shall be clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.

13

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

in quantities

FASTENERS-PART

of

IS : 4981- 1984
TABLE

DIMENSIONS

OF GUIDE

PINS (A) FOR PATTERN PLATES


MOULDING
BOXES
( cl0uses 4. I and 5.I )
All dimensions

1HlS

FACE

TO GUIDE

ROUND

BUSH HOLES

OF

in millimetres.

SHALL

BE
TAPER

NT/
.!y

SQUARE

TO

THE

AXIS

OF

PIN

1 IN 10

Guide Pin (A) Dimensions


A

r
d,
(dIO*)

d>

d3

d,

hl
(h13*)

I,

12

Ii

(h8*)

19

19

16

30

24

130

22

25

22

22

20

32

27

135

22

30

25

25

24

36

32

150

27

36

30

30

24

40

36

150

32

36

Size of Pattern Plate


mmXmm

From
to
From
to
From I
to
I
From I
to 2

Note -- These guide pins though recommended for round bush holes may also be used for elongated bush holes of moulding
discretion of the purchaser.
*Deviations in accordance with IS : 919-1963 Recommendations
for limits and fits for engineering (revi.trd).

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

OF GUIDE PINS (B) FOR PATTERN PLATES


BUSH HOLES OF MOULDING BOXES

TO GUIDE

345 X
660 X
750 X

345
660
440

1040x 1040
170
450
650
050

X
x I
X
x 2

680
450
950
050

boxes at the

ELONGATED

( Clauses 4. I and 5. I )
All dimensions
-THIS

FACE

SHALL

in millimetrcs

BE

SQUARE
TAPER

TO

THE

AXIS

OF

PIN

1 IN 10,

l-4
i

-..-+d2-.-

---..

- ---_d?.dt._---____

N5 =04um
N7=I.tkm

11

Guide Pins (B) Dimensions


A

I
bl
(dlO*)

dj
(hll*)

dz

d,

da

bz

1
II

12

(h13)

(h8*)

I9

22

I9

16

30

24

170

22

25

22

25

22

20

32

27

175

22

30

25

28

25

24

36

32

190

27

36

30

34

30

24

40

36

190

32

36

*Deviations

in accordance

HANDBOOK

with IS

ON INDUSTRIAl>

Size of Pattern Plate


mmXmm

: 919-1963 Recommendations

FASTENERS--PAR1

for limits and fits for engineering

From
to
From
to
From I
to
I
From
to 2

345 X 345
660
660 x
750 X 440
104cx1040
170 X 6SO
450 x I 450
650 X 950
050 x 2 050

(revised)

75

IS : 4981- 1984
9. Marking
9.1 The cartons or boxes containing
manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.1.1 The cartons

the guide pins shall be suitably

or boxes containing

marked to indicate size, quantity

the guide pins may also be marked with the 1551Certification

and the

Mark.

Note - The use of the ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the Indian Standards Institution (Certification Marks)
Act and the Ruls and Regulations made thereunder. The IS1 Mark on products covered by an lndian Standard conveys the assurance that
they have been produced to comply with the requirements of that standard under a well-defined system of inspection, testing and quality
control which is devised and supervised by IS1 and operated by the producer. ISI marked products are also continuously checked by IS1 for
conformity to that standard as a further safeguard. Details of conditions, under which a licence for the use of the ISI Certification Mark may
be granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON INDLiSTRIAI,

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6401- 1971
Indian Standard

DOWEL

1. Scope -Covers

the requirements

SPECIFICATION
FOR
PINS FOR USE IN FOUNDRIES

for dowel pins for locating and securing split patterns core boxes and dies in

foundries.
2. Dimensions

-- Shapes and sizes of dowel pins and sockets

TABLE

of a dowel pin of outside diameter

in millimetres.

d, = IO mm:
Insert Dowel I-10 IS

Designation

of a socket of outside diameter

of a complete

I-10 IS

Insert Dowel with Socket

HANDBOOK

ON INDt:STRIAI,

: 6401

dowel pin with socket of outside diameter

Note --- The depth of recess of grooves

: 6401

dl = 10 mm:
Socket

Designation

dl = 10 mm:

I-10 IS

: 6401

shall not be more than half of the thickness

FASTENERS-PART

I to 4.

TYPE 1 DOWEL WITH SOCKET

All dimensions

Designation

shall be as specified in Tables

of socket.

77

IS :6401- 1971

TABLE

TYPE 2 PLATE

DOWEL

AND SOCKET

WITHOUT

FAUCET

( Clause 2 )
All dimensions

PLATE

d,

a2

62

30
36
42

4
5
6

5
6
8

OOWEL WITHOUT

12
15
18

FAUCET

22
26
32

in millimetres.

(VI

SOCKET
WiTHOUT

PLATE
FAUCET

d,

L4

Fixing with Three


Countersunk
Head
Wood Screws
Screw Designation
(see 3.1 of
IS : 451-1961*)

3.1
4.3
4.8

19
25
31

7
8
9

Designation

of a plate dowel without

faucet of diameter d, = 36 mm:


Plate Dowel 2-36 IS

*
: 6401

Designation

of a socket plate without

faucet of diameter da = 36 mm:


Socket Plate 2-36 IS

: 6401

Designation

*Specification

of a complete

plate dowel with socket plate, both without faucet of diameter


Plate Dowel with Socket Plate 2-36 IS : 6401

d, = 36 mm:

for wood screws (revised).

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6401- 1971
TABLE 3

TYPE 3 PLATE DOWEL AND SOCKET WITH FAUCET


( Cbuse 2 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

EDGE ROUNDED

ds

u3

bs

ds

dm

dll

du

LS

L6

L7

Fixing with Three


Countersunk Head
Wood Screws.
Screw Designation
(see 3.1 of
IS : 451-1961)

42
52
65

6
8
10

8
10
13

18
23
30

32
40
50

4.8
5.3
5.8

24
30
38

8
II
14

39
50
64

14
19
24

9
10
12

Designationof

a plate dowel with faucet of dtameter

dg = 52 mm:
Plate Dowel 3-52 IS

: 6401

Designation

of a socket plate with faucet of diameter & = 52 mm:


Socket Plate 3-52 IS : 6401

D,esignation

of a complete

HANDBOOK

OR fNDUSTRTAL

plate dowel with socket plate of diameter do = 52 mm:


Plate Dowel with Socket 3-52 IS : 6401

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6401- 1971

TABLE

TYPE 4 DOWEL

WITH SOCKET FOR METAL


( Clause 2 )
All dimensions

to IS

: 1369-1961 Dimensions

of screw thread

: 1368-1967 Dimensions

to IS

run outs and undercuts.


Short

Dowel

of ends of bolts and screws.


From L -

du

SOCKET

W(V)

Form K 21 is according

AND DIES

in millimetres.

SOCKET OOWEL OR LONG DOWEL

XI is according

CORE BOXES

dir

Long Dowel

L9

LB

d16

LIO

Form
K

Form
L

LII

Form
K

Form
L

Ml0

15

10

12

I5

30

50

65

Ml2

18

12

16

20

40

60

80

24

16

20

25

50

80

105

28

20

25

30

60

100

130

10

18

Ml6

30

Designation

of a short dowel for metal core boxes and dies of diameter dll = 12 mm:
Short Dowel 5-12 IS :-6401

Designation

of a short dowel with socket of diameter


Short

Designation

dlj = 12 mm:
Dowel with Socket 4-12 IS

of a socket for metal core boxes and dies of diameter

: 6401

dlj = I2 mm:

Socket 4-12 IS : 6401


(Continued)

IS :6401- 1971

TABLE

TYPE 4 DOWEL

WITH

SOCKET

FOR METAL

All dimensions

CORE BOXES

AND DIES-Conrd

in millimetres.

CSK

ES

No. 1

Burh

Bush No. 2

\!
I

--ii

Combi-

I2

l-l

38

12

l-2

46

I6

1-3

50

I6

nation*

I----Bush No. 4

Bush No. !I

(VI

l-4

52

I6

2-I

38

IO

20

2-2

46

I2

24

2-3

52

I2

26

2-4

56

I6

28

*These indicate

HANDBOOK

guide pin and bush combinations.

ON INDISTRIAI.

FASTENERS--FART

IS : 6401 - 1971

TABLE

TYPE 4 DOWEL

WITH

SOCKET

FOR METAL

All dimensions

Guide Pin No.

Combination*

d,

dz

1-I
1-2
1-3
1-4
2-l
2-2
2-3
2-4

12
16
20
22
12
16
20
22

8
12
14
16
10
12
16
16

M6
Ml0
Ml2
Ml4
M8
MI0
Ml4
Ml4

*These indicate

AND DIES-Conrd

in millimetres.

17.5
20
26
26

CORE BOXES

Guide Pin No. 2

18
22
25
30
18
22
25
30

I3

I4

IO
14
18
18
10
14
18
I8

12
16
20
20
12
16
20
20

22
30
35
38
22
30
35
38

4
4
5
5

8
11
14
17
8
11
14
17

5
6
7
8
5
6
7
8

guide pin and bush combinations.

3. Material
3.1 The material
ground.

for pins and bushes shall be low carbon steel and the guide portions

shall be case hardened

and

4. General
4.1 The rounding

of the dowel shall be subject to the manufacturers

choice.

5. Tolerances
5.1 Coarse class IS : 2102-1969 Recommendations
tolerances.

for machining

deviations

for dimensions

without specified

6. Supply
6.1 According
7. Marking -

to IS : 1387- 1967 General requirements

materials first

revision).

Mark with the following:

a) Designation,

and

b) Name or trade-mark
7.1 ZSI Certification
82

for the supply of metallurgical

Marking

of the manufacturer.
-

Details available

with the Indian

Standards

HANDBOOK

Institution.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6688 - 1981
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR TAPER
( Firsr Revision )

1. Scope -

Covers the requirements

2. Types -

Taper pins shall be of three types:

range of 0.6 to 50 mm

Pins that are ground with a surface finish N6 (see IS : 4290-1968 Specification
comparison
specimens)
Pins that are turned with a surface finish N7 (see IS : 4290-1968)
Split taper pins with a surface finish N7 (see IS : 4290-1968).

Type A Type B Type C -

3. Dimensions

for taper pins in the diameter

PINS

for roughness

and Tolerances

3.1 The dimensions

for taper pins shall be as given in Table 1.

and tolerances

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS FOR TAPER PINS


( Clauses 3. I and 6 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

r-_,d

rssd
TAPER I:50

rzd

rrd

&

TAPER 1:50
-

-a

-c-a
I

TYPE A

TYPE B

r-d

rcrd

1
@d
-AC
I
a ---

TAPER
-1:50
1

\
-

c=o*21
1

TYPE C

,
d h10 Nom

as

0.6 / 0.8

,
! 0.08: 0.1

2.5; 3 I4
1
5
i6
; 8 i 10 5 12 7; 16 20 1 25
0
il.2
/I.5
2
t
4
/
3
/ 0.16j 0.2 0.251 0.3, 0.4 j 0.5 j 0.63 i 0.8 / I j 1.2 1.6 j 2 ; 2.5
1

0.12

30

40

50

3.2 The taper on the taper pins shall be I : 50. The cone angle tolerance shall be AT8 for Type A pins and ATlO
for Types B and C pins in accordance with IS : 7615-1975 Specification for system of cone tolerance. Angle
tolerance AT8 and AT!0 shall be applied on taper pins with nominal length greater than 6 mm.

__----__.-

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

83

IS : 6688 - 1981
3.3. The preferred

length-diameter
TABLE

combinations

PREFERRED

shall be as given in Table 2.

LENGTH-DIAMETER
All dimensions

COMBINATIONS

75

Note I
Note 2

.
I

PINS

in inillimetres.

DIAMETER

FOR TAPER

I.1

For lengths beyond 200 mm. steps of 20 mm may be used.


Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

ured from steel C 30 of IS : 5517-1978 Steels for


or any other suuable steel with a minimum tensile strength of 500 N/mm2. At the
request ot the purchaser, free cutting steels conforming to IS : 443 I-1978 Specification for carbon and carbor
manganese free-cutting steel (firer revision), may also be used for manufacture.

84

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6688 - 1981
5. Designation
and number

- Taper pins shall be designated


of the standard.

by name, type (A, B or C), nominal

diameter,

nominal

length,

Examples:
A taper pin of Type A of nominal

diameter

10 mm and nominal

length 50 mm shall be designated

Taper Pin A 10 X 50 IS : 6688


A split taper pin (Type C) of nominal diameter 20 mm and nominal
as:

as:

length 60 mm shall be designated

Split Taper Pin C 20 X 60 IS : 6688


6. Workmanship and Finish - All pins shall be free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface finish of the
various faces shall be as shown in Table 1.
7. Packing -The pins shall be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
shall be clearly indicated on the cartons or boxes.
8. ISI Certification

Marking -

Details available

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY
This standard was first published
line with IS0 2339-1974. The following

of 10,20,50 or 100. The size and quantity

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

in 1972. A revision has been necessitated


major changes have been madt:

for bringing

a)

The concept of cone angle tolerance has been brought instead of taper tolerance
cone angle tolerance as elaborated in IS : 7615-1975 also includes straightness
permissible limits of the cone taper.

b)

The method

c)

Nominal
added.

RANDBOOK

of representation

diameters

ON INDUSTRIAL,

0.6,0.8,

of the surface roughness

in

specified earlier. The


tolerance within the

value has been modified.

1 and 1.2 mm and, correspondingly,

FASTENERS-PART

the standard

lengths 2,3,4,5

and 6 mm have been

85

IS : 6689- 1972
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
HARDENED
CYLINDRICAL
1. Scope

-- Covers the requirements

for hardened

2. Dimensions - The dimensions and tolerance


combinations
shall be as given in Table I.
3. Material - Hardened
strength of 600 MN/ mz.

pins covered

cylindrical
of hardened

in this standard

and the number

~~~The harden:d cylindrical


of the standard.

pins in the diameter


cylindrical

range 1.5 to 20 mm.

pins and preferred

length-diameter

shall be made from steel having a minimum

4. Hardness -- 700 + 50HV [ see IS : 1501-1968Method


5. Designation

PINS

for Vickers hardness

pins shall be designated

tensile

test for steel (first revision)].

by the nominal diameter, the nominal

length

Example:

A hardened
as:

cylindiical

pin of nominal
Hardened

6. Workmanship

diameter

4 mm and nominal

length 20 mm shall be designated

Pin 4 X 20 IS : 6689

and Finish

6.1 All pins shall be manufactured


figure in Table 1.

free from burrs, scales and tool marks. The surface fmish shall be as shown in

7. Packing
7.1 The pins may be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities
clearly indicated in the cartons or boxes.
8. ISI Certification

86

Marking -

Details available

of 10,25, 50 or 100. The size and quantity

with the Indian

Standards

HANDBOOK

shall be

Institution.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6689

- 1972

s.
TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS FOR HARDENED


( Clauses 2 and 6.1 )

CYLINDRICAL

PINS

All dimensions in millimetres.

rlP

2*5

WITHOUT

BURR

1.5

10

12

16

20

1.506 2'006 2.506 3.006 'L.012 5.012 6.012 8.015 10.015 12.01616*01620.021
1.502 2.002 2-502. 3.002 2*004 5.0db PO04 6.006 10406 12.007 16.00720.008
L
0.23
0*12

)
1

0.3 1 O*L 1 O-45 1 0.6


048

1 0.251

1 0.75 1

0.9 1 1.2

I
1.5

0.3 1 0.2 ) O-5 1 0*6 ) 0.6 1 1

12
1.6

16

20

2.5

1.3

I.7

1
js 15

4
ii
8
10
12
16
16
E
30
35

.a
L5
50
55
60
65
70
75
80.
90
100
110
120
130
1LO
150
160
170
180
190
200

Note 1 Note 2-

I
i

For lengths beyond 200 mm steps of 20 mm may be used.


Preferred lengths are between the stepped lines.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

In this stfindard, hardened pins in the diameter range 1.5 to 20 mm have been covered. Unhardened
cylindrical pins are covered in IS : 2393-1980 Specification for cylindrical pins (second revision).
HANDBOOKONINDIJSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3

87

IS : 6862 - 1981
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR CLEVIS PINS
( First Revision )

1. Scope -

Covers the requirements

2. Types -

Clevis pins shall be of two types:

Type A Type B -

for clevis pins in the diameter

Clevis pins without split pinholes,


Clevis pins with split pinholes.

range 3 to 100 mm.

and

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions

and tolerances

TABLE.1

for the clevis pins shall be as given

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

All dimensions

TYPE
SPLIT

in Table

FOR CLEVIS

1.

PINS

in millimetres.

TYPE

A WITHOUT
PIN HOLES

B WITH SPLIT
PIN HOLES

*Recommended
tolerances al I cl I, f8, hll.
712, clamping length, to be specified by the purchaser (see 5.1).
$Hole diameter d, = nominal size of the split pin [see IS : 549-1974Specitication
for split pins (second revisionh. For
railway applications_and in cases where the split pins are subjected to alternating transverse forces, it is recommended to use
the next larger split pin and corresponding
hole diameter to that specified.

88

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

km-

IS : 6862; 1981
3.2 The Preferred Lengrh-Diameter
TABLE 2

PREFERRED

combinations

_ -___

shall be as given in Table

LENGTH-DIAMETER

2.

COMBINATIONS FOR CLEVIS PINS

All dimensions in millimetres.

Note 1 - Preferred lengths are shown between stepped bola nnes.


Note 2 -

For lengths above 300 mm, use steps of 20 mm.

4. Material - Clevis pins, conforming to this standard, shall conform to C30 of IS : 55 17-1978 Specification for
steels for hardening and tempering Cfirst rivision) or any suitable steel with a minimum tensile strength of 500
N/mm*. At the request of purchaser, clevis pins may also be supplied from free-cutting steels conforming to IS :
443 1: J978 Soecification for carbon and carbon-manganese
free-cutting steel Cfirst revision).

_.___-..-_

-HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

89

--__.

.._

..

IS : 6&2 -3 1981
5. Designation - Clevis pins shall be designated by the type, nominal size, togrance on diameter and nominal
length. In the case of Type B clevis pins, the clamping length, 12 shall be ad$ed after the nominal length.
Example:
A clevis pin of Type A, nominal
designated as:

sized, = 10 mm, tolerance

h 11 on diameter and length 30 mm shall be

Clevis Pin AlOh 11 X 30 IS : 6862


5.1 For a clevis pin of Type B, the total length I is arrived at by adding the dimension 12(the desired clamping
length), dz (hole diameter), and 2 I,. The minimum dimension 1, calculated thus, shall be rounded off to the next
higher standard length 1 as given in Table 2.
Example:
For a clevis pin of Type B, nominal size dl = 20 mm, tolerance h 11 on diameter, clamping length 60
mm, the total length shall work out as 81 mm. Therefore, a clevis pin of 85 mm total length shall be
selected from Table 2. The designation shall then be as follows:
Clevis Pin B20hll

X 85 X 60 IS : 6862

Note - It is obvious that the dimension II will increase corresponding

to the increase

in the total length, I.

6. General Requirements
6.1 The pin surface shall be smooth, free from serrations,
marks shall be permissible.

die marks, deep scratches, etc, although

6.2 The pin shall be free from imperfect

edges, burrs, rust and pit marks,

7. Sampling - Sampling
threaded fasteners.

criteria shall conform

8. Packing

and acceptance

Pins shall be packed in suitable

to IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling

Marking

non-

cartons.

9. Marking - Cartons shall be marked with the name of the manufacturer


nominal size, type and the quantity of pins.
9.1 JSI Certification

slight free roll

Details available

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

Standards

or initials or trade-mark,

if any,

Institution.

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1973. In the earlier version, the method of specifying the clamping
length for Type B clevis pins (the outer distance between the split pin holes) was 3ot clearly spelt out. The method
of arriving at the total length of the clevis pin from the required clamping length has been included in the present
revision and consequent changes have been made in the designation of clevis pins. The nominal length of the pin
has been increased to 300 mm. Reference has also been made to the relevant Indian Standard for sampling and
acceptance criteria for clevis pins.
Clevis ,pins with head are covered
In the preparation

90

of the standard,
Clevis

in IS : 6863-1973.
assistance

has been derived from the following

a)

IS0 2340-1972
Standardization.

pins-Metric

b)

DIN 1443-1974 Bolzen ohne Kopf-Mape


Deutsches Instiut fiir Normung.

series issued

by the

International

nach IS0 (Clevis pins without

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

publications:
Organization

for

head) issued by the

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6863 - 1973

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
1. Scope

2. Types -

Covers the requirements


Clevis pins with head

FOR CLEVIS

PINS WITH HEAD

of clevis pins with head.


shall be of the following

Type A -

Clevis pin with head but without

Type B -

Clevis pin with head and split pin holes.

types:

split pin holes.

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions

of the pins shall be as given in Table

TABLE 1

I.

OF CLEWS
PINS WITH HEAD (TYPE A AND B)
( Clauses 3.1 and 3.3 )

DIMENSIONS

All dimensions in millimetres.

BREAK

TYPE A WITHOUT
SPLIT

ldt

PIN

TYPE

EDGES

B WITH SPLlT
PIN HOLE

HOLE

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

24

10

14

18

20

36

22

25

28

30

33

tdzH13

0.8

1.2

1.6

3.2

3.2

6.3

c Max

e=

0.5

0.5

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

1.6

4.5

5.5

II Min

1.6

2.2

2.9

3.2

3.5

4.5

5.5

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

0.6

*dl

27

30

33

36

40

45

50

55

60

70

80

90

100

40

44

47

50

55

60

66

72

78

90

100

110

120

tdlH13

6.3

IO

10

10

10

c Max

e?

II

II Min

10

10

10

10

12

12

14

*Recommended
tHo]e diameter
applications

tolyance al I. cl 1, fg. hl 1.
& = nominal size of the split pin (see IS

and in cases where split pin is subjected to alternating

corresponding

hole diameter

to that specified.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

13

13

13

13

13

13

13

14

16

16

16

16

.I2

: 549-1961) Specification
transverse

13

for SplitcotterPins ( revised)'.


FOr railway

forces, it is recommended

to use the next larger Pin and

-.

FASTENERS-PART

91

Is ifirrd.3- 1973
3.2 The preferred

length-diameter

combinations

shall be as given in Table 2.


l

TABLE2

PREFERREDLENGTH-DIAMETERCOMBINATIONSFORCLEVISPINSWITHHEAD
Alldimensions

190 1
200 I

[
1
1 1

1
1

1
1

1
I

I
I

I
I

I
I

Note 1 - Nominal length in parenthesis

should

I
1
be avoided,

in millimetrks.

if possible.

Note 2 ~ For length between 200and 300 mm, use steps of IO mm; above 300mm, use steps of 20 mm

3.3 The tolerances

on the dimensions

shall be as given in Table

1.

4. Mechanical RequirementsClevis pins with head shall generally be manufactured


from steel conforming
C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedule for wrought steels for general engineering purposes.
5. Finish

92

Pins shall be supplied

in natural

finish, unless otherwise

stated by the purchaser.

HANDBOOKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3

to

IS :6863

- 1973

6. Designation - Clevis pins with head shall be designated by the type, nominal size, tolerance on diameter and
length. In case of Type B clevis pins, the length from the underside of head to centre of split pin hole should be
specified after the nominal length.
Example

I:

Clevis pin with head and without split pin hole (Type A) of nominal
cl I on diameter and length 30 mm shall be designated as:
Clevis Pin A10 Example

cl 1 X 30 -

size 10 mm, with a tolerance

of

IS : 6863

2:

Clevis pin with head and split pin holes (Type B) of nominal size 20 mm with a tolerance of c 1 I on
diameter length 70 mm and length of 60 mm from underside of head to centre of split pin hole, shall be
designated as:
Clevis Pin B20 -

IS : 6863

c 11 X 70 X 60 -

7. General Requirements
7.1 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
7.2 The pins shall be free from burrs, imperfect
8. Sampling of non-threaded
9. Packing

Sampling and acceptance


fasteners.

die marks, deep scratches,

edges, pit marks, loose scale, cracks and other harmful defects.
with IS : 6821-1973 Method for sampling

criteria to be in accordance

The pins shall be packed in suitable

cartons.

10. Marking - The cartons containing the pins, shall be marked


trade-mark,
if any, nominal size and the quantity of pins.
10.1 ISI Certification

Marking

etc, although slight free

Details available

with the manufacturers

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

Standard

name or initial or

Institution.

NOTE

In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been drawn from IS0 2341-1972 Clevis pins with
head-metric
series issued by the International
Organization
for Standardization.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

93

---E-z

IS :7368-

1974

Indian Standard

SIECIFICATION

FOR GROOVED

TAPER

PINS

1. Scope - This standard covers the requirements for grooved taper pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm intended
for use as fastening elements for general engineering purposes.
2. Dimensions

and Tolerances

2.1 The grooved

taper pins shall conform

to the shape and dimensions

2.2 The preferred

length-diameter

combinations

2.3 The preferred

length-diameter

over grooving

2.4 Tolerances

on the hole receiving

,are given in Table


combinations

given in Table

1.

1.

are given in Table

1.

the pins shall be as shown below:

Dia dl

Tol

Up to 3 mm

H9.

Above 3 mm

HII

--r
3. Materials - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel Conforming to C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steqls for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosion,esistant steel, copper, brass or monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation - Pins shall be designated
protective coating, if any.

by the nominal

size, length of pin, the number

of this standard

and

Example:
A pin of nominal

size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate


Grooved

coating

shall be designated

as:

Taper Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7368 Phosphated

6. General Requirements
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming
maximum corresponding
hole.
6.2 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs, rust,pit

process ensuring interference

die marks, deep scratches, etc; although

marks, loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

6.4 The other requirements,


not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurigical
materials ($rsr revision ).
7. Sampling - Sampling and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number
Each carton shall have pins of one size only.

with respect to

shall be determined

slight free

defects.

with IS : 1387-1967 General

in accordance

with IS : 6821-1973

of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 and 1000.

9. Marking
3.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end, except on those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked
with the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.2 ISZCertrjlcation Marking -

Details available

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.
.

94

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 1368- 1974

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

FOR GROOVED

TAPER

PINS

( Clauses 2. I, 2.2 and 2.3 )


All dimensions

in millimetres.

IMETER
OVER
GROOVING

NOMINAL
DIAMETER

5
ToI

DIAMETER

OVER

GROOVING

3.25

2.2c I

4.30
2.70

5.30

6.30

3.30
1.60

6.35

1.35

5.35

lO.LO
12.LO

3.25

2.15

6.35

2.65

13.45
8.40

L.30

:
IO.45

5.30
3.20

12.45

__

13.50

14.50 (

/
16.60

6.30

8.35
1.25

O.&O

5.25

-L
12.40

I I

l--i

20.6C I2 5.6C

i-

6.25

8.30
10.35
a.25

-t-

HANDBOOK

Sizes shown in brackets

ON INDUSTRIAL

10.30
1

+0.05

Note -

12.30

to.10

are of second preference.

FASTENERS-PART

95

IS : 7368- 1974
EXPLANATORY

NOTE

In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been taken from DIN 1471-1956 Kegelkerbstifte
(Grooved taper pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration
of a few applications
is given in
Appendix
A. This standard ,is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to this series are:
IS
IS
IS
IS

:
:
:
:

7383-1974
7384-1974
7385-1974
7386-1974

Grooved
Grooved
Grooved
Grooved

knuckle pins
straight pins with guide end
dowel pins
socket pins

APPENDIX

APPLICATIONS

FIG.

USED AS A PIN FOR RETAINING


A WATER PUMP IMPELLER

FIG. 3 USED AS A DRIVING


IN A CARDAN SHAFT

96

PIN

FIG. 2

FIG. 4

USED AS AN AXIAL
IN BEARING BUSH

PIN

USED AS A PIN FOR SECURING


A BEVEL GEAR

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

3
I

IS : 7383 - 1974
1

T
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED KNUCKLE PINS

1. Scope - This standard


intended for use as joining
2. Dimensions

covers the requirements


pins.

for grooved

knuckle

and Tolerances

2.1 The grooved

knuckle

pins shall conform

to the shape and dimensions

2.2 The preferred

length-diameter

combinations

are given in Table

2.3 The preferred

length-diameter

over grooving

combinations

2.4 Tolerances

pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm,

on the hole receiving

given in Table

1.

I.

are given in Table

1.

the pin shall he as shown below:


Tol

Din d,

to .3 mm

H9

Above 3 mm

HII

Up

FB
3. Material - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish, unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation
and protective

- The pins shall be designated


coating; if any.

by the nominal

size, length of pinand

the number of this standard

Example:
A pin of nominal

size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate


Grooved

Knuckle

coating

shall be designated

as:

Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7383 Phosphated

6. General Requirements
6.1 The grooves on the pin should be made only by the metal-forming
to maximum corresponding
hole.
6.2 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs, rust,pit

marks,

process ensuring

loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

shall be determined

8. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number


Each carton shall have pins of one size only.

with respect

die marks, deep scratches, etc; .althougR slight free

6.4 The other requirements


not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials yirst revision).
7. Sampling - Sampling and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.

interference

defects.

with IS : 1387-1967 General

in accordance

with IS: 6821-1973

of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 or 1000.

9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins may be marked with
the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.2 ISI Certification

Marking

Details available

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

I
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

97

IS : 7383- 1974
TABLE

1 DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

FOR GROOVED

KNUCKLE

PINS

( Clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3 )


All dimensions

r%?_

_v

in millimetres.

_ -G_.
/
_I

__-__3

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

Tol

1.5

1 2

I---_,--

124

1 3

0.23

/ 0.3

0.6

0.45

0.6

1.6

2.5

1 6

1 8

j 10 1 12

ToI on
I
I

/ (13) 1 14

O-9

/ 0.75
I

DIAMETER

1.2

1.5

/ 14

10

-12

OVE$

12dO

2.5

16

16

20

25

13.25

lL.25

16.25

13.30

lfi.30

16.30

1340

IfdO

12.50

13.50

iL.50

98

20.25

25.25

20.30

25.30

20*&O

2540

20.50

25.50

1640

8.10

Sizes shown in brackets

1 25

12

ZE
6.35

Note -

1 20

GR~~wNG

5.25

DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING

1 16

hll

r APPROX

1 5

h9

c max.
LENGTH

16.50

TO.05
I

are of second preference.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

3
I

IS : 7383 - 1974

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

In the preparation
of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1475-1956 Knebelkerbstifte
(Grooved knuckle pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
illustration
of a few applications
is given in
Appendix
A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to this series are:
IS : 7368-1974 Grooved

taper pins

IS : 7384-1974 Grooved

straight

IS : 7385-1974 Grooved

dowel pins

IS : 7386-1974 Grooved

socket pins

pins with guide end

APPENDIX

FIG. 1

USED

FIG. 2

AS A GUIDE

USED

PIN IN A WALL SOCKET

AS A KNUCKLE

IN A THREADED

BOLT

PL>UG

_._.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FhTENERS-PART

99

.---

IS : 7384- 1974
Indian Standard

GROOVED

1. Scope

-This

SPECIFICATION
FOR
STRAIGHT
PINS WITH GUIDE END

standard covers the requirements for grooved straight pins with guide end in the size range 1.5
for use as connecting pins and in rail vehicles construction.

to 25 mm intended

2. Dimensions

and Tolerances

2.1 The grooved

straight

2.2 The preferred

pins with guide end shall conform

length-diameter

combinations

2.2.1 For use in rail vehicle construction,


Table 2.
2.3 The preferred
2.4 Tolerances

length-diameter

of pin are given in Table

the preferred

over grooving

on the hole receiving

to the shape and dimensions

1.

1.

length-diameter

combinations

given in Table

combinations

are given in Table

of pin are given in

1.

the pin shall be as shown below:


Din dl

Tol

Up to 3 mm

H9

Above

3 mm

HI1

LZB
3.. Material - The pins shall be made of cola ur-awn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass or monel metal as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation
and protective

- The pins shall be designated


coating, if any.

by the nominal

size, length of pin and the number of this standard

Example:
A pin of nominal
Grooved

size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate


Straight

coating

shall be designated

as:

Pin with Guide End 3 X 12 IS : 7384 Phosphated

6. General Requirements
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming process
maximum corresponding
hole.
6.2 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs, rust,pit

ensuring

interference

die marks, deep scratches, etc, although

marks, loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

6.4 The other requirements,


not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials Cfirst revision).
7. Sampling - Sampling
and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Packing -- Unless otherwise specified, the number
Each carton shall have pins of one size only.

with respect to

shall be determined

slight free

defects.

with IS : 1387-1967 General

in accordance

with IS: 6821-1973

of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 or 1000.

9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may Be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked with
the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.

100

HANDBOOK

DN INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7384- 1974
9.2 IS/ Certification Marking -

Details available

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES FOR GROOVED STRAIGHT PIN WITH GUIDE END
( Clauses

2.1 and

2.3

All dimensions in millimetres.

1 LENGTH

1~01 on]

DIAMETER

OVER

GROOVING

L.25
5.25

6.30
8.30
IO.35
12.35

(45)
50
(55)

60
(65)
70
90

!0.5

25.5

+o.a

90

100
(110)
TOLERANCE
ON
DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING

2 0.05

+0.05

Note - Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

101

,IS:1384- 1974
TABLE

PREFERRED

COI\1RINATION

I.EN(;T)I--I)IAbl~~TI~:R
GLIIDE

END

1Sk:D IN RZII,

IOR GROO\F:D

\EHl~l.l~:

COSS.rRI

STRAIGHT

PINS

WITH

CTIOY

+0.5

t-l
60

70

+o.B

80

Note 1 -

The lengths within the stepped

lines. particularly

those with the cross indication

are the preferred

ones.

Note 2 - The grooved straight pins with guide end are recommended
for use in rail vehicle construction.
Use of this type of pins
prevent tilting while being hammered in. If the sizes, not contained in Table 2, are unavoidable, these shall be taken from Table I.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

In the preparation of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1470-1961 Zylinderkerbstifte
mit
Einguhr-Ende
(Grooved straight pins with guide end) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration of a
few applications is given in Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on
grooved pins. Other standards belonging to the series are:

102

IS : 7368-1974 Grooved

taper pins

IS : 7383-1974 Grooved

knuckle

IS : 7385-1974 Grooved

dowel pins

IS : 7386-1974 Grooved

socket pins

pins

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7384-

APPENDIX

FIG. I

USED AS A TANGENTIAL

FIG. 3

USED AS AN AXIAL

FIG. 2

PIN

USED AS AN OBLIQUE OR INCLINED

FIG. 4

PIN

1974

USED AS A RADIAL

PIN

PIN

L.,.-_.----.
-.-

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

103

I : 7385- 1974
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED DOWEL PINS

1. Scope - This standard


intended for use as joining
2. Dimensions

covers the requirements


pins,

for grooved

dowel pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm,

and Tolerances

2.1 The grooved

dowel pins shall conform

to the shape and dimensions

2.2 The preferred

length-diameter

combinations

are given in Table

2.3 The preferred

length-diameter

over grooving

combinations

2.4 Tolerances

on the hole receiving

given in Table

1.

1.

are given in Table

1.

the pin shall be as shown below:


To1

Din dl

3. Material - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS: 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, or monel metal, as agreed upon between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish - The pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation
and protective

- The pins shall be designated


coating, if any.

by the nominal

size, length of pin, the number

of this standard,

Example:
A pin of nominal

size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate


Grooved

coating

shall be designated

as:

Dowel Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7385 Phosphated

6. General Requirements
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming process
maximum corresponding
hole.
6.2 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs,

rust, pit marks,

ensuring interference

die marks, deep scratches, etc, although

loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

6.4 The other requirements,


not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials yirst revision).
7. Sampling - Sampling and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number
Each carton shall have pins of one size only.

with respect to

shall be determined

slight free

defects.

with IS : 1387-1967 General

in accordance

with IS: 6821-1973

of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 or 1000.

9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end,except those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked with
the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.

104

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :7x&9.2 ISI Cerbfication

Marking

TABLE

Details available

DIMENSIONS

with the Indian

AND TOLERANCES

Standards

FOR GROOVED

1914

Institution.

DOWEL

PINS

( Clauses 2. I, 2.2 and 23 )


All dimensions

NOMINAL

DIAMETER

1.5

c max.
r

APPROX

/ LENGTH

1 2.5

1 5

1 6

1 6

1 10 [ 12

h9
0.23

0.3

0.L

O.&S

0.6

0.75

0.9

1.2

1.5

1.8

2.5

1.6

2.5

10

12

12

16

16

20

DIAMETER

1 25

OVER

L
25,

GROOVING

2.15

+0.3

2.65

10

3.20

--

12

1 (13) 1 14 1 16 1 20

hll

/ToI on1

I
8

101

in millimetres.

5.25

1.63

I
6.25

-t

3.25

(14)

8.25

16

T
10.30

(18)
20

12.30

2.70
6.30

6.30

3.30

28

13.&O

2.15

(30)

lL.LO

8.35

16.50

32
36

3.25

40

13.45
6.35

(45)

20.50

25.51

20.60

25.6

lL.L5
16.55

50
(55)

&LO

60

lO.L5

(65)
70

13.x
6.30

-80
90
100

12.L5

__

+0.a

lL.55

8.35

/
IL.&S
0.35

t-

Note -

HANDBOOK

Sizes shown in brackets

ON INDUSTRIAL

6.55

12.35

are of second preference

FASTENERS-PART

105

1s :7385 - 1974
EXPLANATORY

NOTE

of this standard assistance has been taken from DIN 1472-1956 Passkerbstite
In the preparation
Illustration
of a few applications
is given in
(Grooved dowel pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to the series are:
IS : 7368-1974 Grooved

taper pins

IS : 7383-1974 Grooved

knuckle

pins

IS : 7384-1974 Grooved

straight

pins with guide end

IS : 7386-1974 Grooved

socket pins

APPENDIX

APPLICATIONS

FIG.

FIG. 3

USED AS A STOP PIN

USED AS A DOOR

HINGING

PIN

FIG. 2

SECURING
THE POSITION
OF A BEARING

FIG.,4

STOP

HANDBOOK

PIN FOR A VALVE

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :7386 - 1974
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
GROOVED
SOCKET PINS

1. Scope -- This standard covers the requirements


for grooved socket pins in the size range 1.5 to 25 mm
intended for use for connecting purposes and as a fixture in the hole receiving them.
2. Dimensions

and Tolerances

2.1 The grooved

socket pins shall conform

to the shape and dimensions

2.2 The preferred

length-diameter

combinations

are given in Table

2.3 The preferred

length-diameter

over grooving

combinations

2.4 Tolerances

on the hole receiving

given in Table

1.

1.

are given in Table

1.

the pin shall be as shown below:

h
Dia dl

Tol

Up to 3 mm

H9

Above 3 mm

HI1

3. Materials - The pins shall be made of cold drawn steel conforming to C40 of IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes. Where so specified, pins may also be supplied in corrosionresistant steel, copper, brass, monel metal as agreed to between the manufacturer
and user.
4. Finish -The
pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser. At the
request of purchaser, pins may be copper plated. nickel plated, cadmium plated, phosphated or anodized. The
properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
5. Designation - Pins shall be designated
protective coating, if any.

by the nominal

size, length of pin and the number of this standard

and

Example:
A pin of nominal

size 3 mm and 12 mm in length with phosphate


Grooved

coating

shall be designated

as:

Socket Pin 3 X 12 IS : 7386 Phosphated

6. General Requirements
6.1 The grooves on the pin shall be made only by the metal-forming
maximum corresponding
hole.
6.2 The pin surfaces shall be smooth and free from serrations,
roll marks shall be permissible.
6.3 Pins shall also be free from burrs, rust,pit

process ensuring

interference

die marks, deep scratches, etc, although

marks, loose scale, cracks and all other harmful

6.4 The other requirements,


not covered in this standard, shall be in accordance
requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials yirst revision).
7. Sampling - Sampling and acceptance criteria
Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.

shall be determined

8. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number


Each carton shall have pins of one size only.

with respect to
slight free

defects.

with IS : 1387-1967 General

in accordance

with IS: 6821-1973

of pins packed in each carton shall be 100,500 or 1000.

9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be stamped, during the process of manufacture, at the
end, except on those having nominal diameter 14 mm or under. The cartons containing the pins shall be marked
with the size and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark.
9.2 ZSI Certification

HANDBOOK

Marking -

Details available

ON INDUSTWIALFASTENERS-PART

with the Indian

Standards

fnstitution

107

IS : 7386 - 1974
TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

FOR GROOVED

SOCKET PINS

( Clauses 2.1, 2.2 and 2.3)


All dimensions in millimetres.

DIAMETER

OVER

GROOVING

--E
6.15

I
) 2.70 t-_-1 ~25 )

10.20

12.25

6.30

i--i

13.25

12.&O) 13.&O

6.35 ( &LO
IO45
12.50

13.50

IL.50

16.50
20.50

25.50

20.15

25.45

10.60
12.65

13.45

IL.45

16.L5

4
DIAMETER
OVER GROOVING

Note -

to.05

ro.05

2 0.10
1

I4

Sizes shown in brackets are of second preference.

_..

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 7386 - 1974
EXPLANATORY

NOTE

In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been taken from DIN 1474-1956 Steck-kerbstifte
(Grooved socket pins) issued by Deutscher Normenausschuss.
Illustration
of a few applications
is given in
Appendix A. This standard is one of a series of Indian Standards being prepared on grooved pins. Other
standards belonging to this series are:
IS : 7368-1974 Grooved

taper pins

IS : 7383-1974 Grooved

knuckle

pins

IS : 7384-1974 Grooved

straight

pins with guide end

IS : 7385-1974 Grooved

dowel pins,

APPENDIX

APPLICATIONS

FIG.

USED

AS A HANDLE

FIG. 3

FOR A VALVE

FIG. 2

USED AS A STOP PIN


ON A GAS TAP

USED AS A STOP PIN ON THE ARMATURE


OF MINIATURE
ELECTRIC
MOTOR

---

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

109

IS : 8351 - 1977

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
(HEAVY

1. Scope--

Covers the requirements

2. Dimensions

FOR SPIRAL
DUTY TYPE)

PINS

of spiral pins of heavy duty type in the diameter

range 1.5 to 6 mm.

and Tolerances

2.1 As given in Table

I.

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR

SPIRAL

All dimensions

PINS OF HEAVY

DUTY

TYPE

in millimetres.

e
_----

Qdc

@d2

I
--la-

Size*

1.5

o==

0.5

0.7

0.8

1.3

1.7

0.22

0.28

0.33

0.45

0.56

0.67

2. I

2.6

3.12

4.15

5.15

6.25

+ 0.1
0

+ 0.1
0

+ 0.13
0

+ 0.15
0

+ 0.15
0

+ 0.15
0

0.17

Basic

2.5

1.6

d,
To1
Before
Fitting

+ 0.08
0

Basic

1.4

1.9

2.35

2.85

3.8

4.8

5.8

dz
Tol
-

Shear
Force.
in Nt

0
0.1

0
0.15

0
0.15

0
0.15

0
0.2

0
0.3

0
0.4

Single
Shear

892

I 539

2 324

3 363

6 021

9 276

13 238

Double
Shear

I 784

3 078

4 648

6 726

12 042

18 552

26 476

Min

*Size of the spiral pin is also the nominal


t I N = 0.102 kgf.

110

diameter

of the receiving

hole.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 8351
2.2 The preferred

TABLE

length-sire

combinations

PREFERRED

01 the spir;ll

LENGTH-SIZE

COMBINATIONS
All dimensions

Note -

Preferred

2.3 Tolerance

length-size

combinations

on the hole receiving

pins shall

be as giccn

OF SPIRAL

in Table

PINS OF

- 1977

2.

HEAVY DliTY TYPE

in millimetres.

are between the stepped

bold lines.

the pin shall be H 12.

3. Material - Spiral pins of heavy duty type shall be made from carbon spring steel 75C6 [see IS : 2507-l 975
Specification
for cold rolled steel strip for springs (_firsrrevision)] hardened and tempered to 350 to 475 HV[see
IS : 1501-1968 Method for Vickers hardness test for steel (jirst revision)].
4. Designation - Spiral pins of heavy duty type shall be designated
standard, and protective coating, if any.

by the name, size, length, number

of this

Example:
A spiral pin of heavy duty type of nominal
be designated as:

size 3 mm and length 24 mm with phosphate

coating shall

Spiral Pin 3 X 24 IS : 8351 Phosphated


5. Sampling

and Acceptance

5.1 The sampling procedure for the testing and acceptance criteria for the spkal pins shall be in accordance
IS : 6821-1973 Methods for sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
5.2 For purposes
be as follows:

of sampling

and criteria for conformity

Major

Outside

Defect

diameter,

the classification

Minor

d,

Diameter

with

of defects into major and minor shall

Defect

over chamfer,

dz

(measured with a ring


Sheet thickness,

gauge)

Length, I

Freedom from burrs

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

111

IS : 8351 - 1977
6. General

Requirements

6.1 Worktl?at7.~h;p .-.- The surface of the spiral pins shall be smooth and free from scale and burrs. The outer
edges shall be deburred and may also be slightly rounded.
6.2 Finish -~~The spiral pins shall be supplied in natural bright finish unless otherwise specified by the purchaser.
At the request of the purchaser, spiral pins may be copper plated, nickel plated, cadmium plated or phosphated.
The properties shall not be impaired by the protective coatings.
6.3 Shear Strength - Shear force in double shear when tested in accordance with IS : 5242-1969 Method oftest
for determining
shear strength of mild steel with suitably hardened steel bushes, shall not be less than that
specified in Table 1.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

Spiral pins are used for joining (pinning) two or more parts. Apart from their role as fasteners, they may
be employed
as hinges, pivots, locating devices, retainers and so on. The spiral shaped cross-section
(approximately
2% turns) confers high elastic deformability
on the spiral pins. This means that they are also
capable of sustaining dynamic loading. The individual turns of the pin exert a constant preload over the
periphery so that a uniform bearing pressure is likely to result in the receiving hole.
The heavy duty pin is recommended
where shear, shock and vibration
static shear load is greater than the shock and vibration loads.
strength

loads are severe and where the,

The two ends of the pin are given a conical form to facilitate entry into the receiving hole. The shear
of the spiral pin is the same in every radial position and consequently there is no need to align them.

Medium duty spiral pins are covered by a separate Indian Standard. The difference between the two types
of spiral pins is only in the sheet thickness and hence in shear strength. Dimensionally,
the two types of spiral pins
are interchangeable.
Illustration
of an application is given in Fig. I.

FIG. I

USED AS A RADIAL

PIN

In the preparation
of this standard, considerante assistance has been derived from DIN 7344 Spiral
spannstifte, schwere Ausfuhrung (Spiral pins, heavy duty type), 1969, issued by Deutsches lnstitut fur Normung.

112

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR

SPIRAL

PINS OF MEDIUM

DITY TYPE

( C/0USC~
2. I )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

_
Size*

0.8

a=

0.2

0.3

0.07

1.2

0.08

0.4
(

0. I

1.5

0.5
0.13

2.5

0.7

0.17

0.85

I.

1.3

1.62

2.15

3.5

0.8

0.21

Basic

0.25

2.65

I.2

1.3

0.29

0.33

3.67

4.2

T-

-T-

3.15

To1

0.05

Before
fitting
Basic

0.75

+ 0.25

+ 0.25

+ 0.35

t 0.01

0.95

1.15

1.4

I .9

2.35

2.85

3.35

3.x

1.x

5.x

7.75

96

+ 0.01

+ 0.15

+ 0.15

+ 0. I7

+ 0.2

+ 0.75
0

I I.5
___

d2
TOI

0
0.05

0.1

0.1

0
~~ 0.1

0.15

0.15

0
~~ 0.15

I-

Min

*Size

of the spiral

f IN

~0.102

pin is also the nominal

diameter

of the receiving

0.2

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

0.7

I
Shear
force
in N+

hole

kgf.

1.2

I 3.

16.55

---

+ 0.25

+ 0.01

+ 0.05

14.55

dl

I=I=
-I4.5

4 x34

7 492

IO x35

I9 220

30 516

43 9x0

9 66X

I4 9x4

21 670

3x 440

61 032

x7 960

+ 0.4
0

+ 0.45
0

13.5

1.54

0.9

60 424

74 575

--1
I20

84X

149 150

IS : 8379 - 1977
TABLE

PREFERRED

LENGTH-SIZE

COMBINATIONS
( Clause 2.2
All dimensions

180

t .i.
Note
-

Preferred

length-size

are between the stepped

EXPLANATORY
Spiral pins are used for joining (pinning)
also be employed as hinges, .pivots, locating
(approximately
2% turns) confers high elastic
capable of sustaining dynamic loading. The
periphery, so that a uniform bearing pressure

PINS OF MEDIUM

TYPE

bold lines

NOTE

two or more parts. Apart from their role as fasteners, they may
devices, retainers and so on. The spiral shaped cross-section
deformability
on the spiral pins. This means that they are also
individual turns of the pin exert a constant preload over the
is likely to be exerted in the receiving hole.

The medium duty pin is recommended


where shear, shock and vibration
where shock and vibration are greater than the static shear load.
strength

DITY

in millimetres

combinations

OF SPIRAL

are of medium

intensity

and

The two ends of the pin are given a conical form to facilities entry into the receiving hole. The shear
of the spiral pin is the same in every radial position and consequently there is no need to align them.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

115

IS : 8379 - 1977
Heavy duty spiral pins are covered by a separate Indian Standard. The difference between the two types of
spiral pins is only in the sheet thickness and hence in shear strength. Dimensionally,
the two types of Spiral Pins
are interchangeable.
Illustration
of an application
is given below.

FIG. 1 USED AS A RADIAL

PIN

In the preparation
of this standard considerable assistance has been derived from DIN 7343 SpiralSPannstifte, Reglausfiihrung
(Spiral pins, medium duty type), issued by the Deutsches Institut fiir Normung,

116

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :10248

- 1982

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
CYLINDRICAL PINS WITH INTERNAL
I._ Scope
i0 mm.

Covers

the requirements

2. Types .- The cylindrical


Type A -

Unhardened

Type B -

Hardened

3. Dimensions

of cylindrical

pins with internal

pins with internal

threads

threads shall be of the following

3.2 The preferred

and tolerances
length-diameter

TABLE1

for cylindrical

pins Hith internal

combinations

for cylindrical

range 6 to

two types:

If

750

l-----------4
TYPE

threads (Types A and B) shall be as given in

pins with internal

threads are given inTable

DIMENSlONSANDTOLERANCESFORCYLINDRlCALPlNS
All dimensions

in millimetres.

qd21

rO4

___..__._
ENLARGED
DETAIL AT X

iAIR VENT1 Al THE


DISCRETION
OF
MANUFACTURER

A (UNHARDENED)

TYPE

B (HARDENED)

(OTHER
OIMENSIONS
DETAILS
AS PER

h8 may also be used at the request of the purchaser.

HANDBO'OKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3
B

in the diameter

and Tolerances

3.1 The dimensions


Table 1.

*Tolerance

THREADS

AND

TYPEA)

2.

1IS :10248

- 1982

TAB1.E 2

PREFERRED

LENGTH-DIAMETER
COMBINATIONS
( Clause 3.2 1
All dimensions

Note 1 -

Preferred

length-diameters

Note 2 ~ For nominal

combinations

FOR CYLINDRICAL

PINS

in millimetres

are between the stepped bold lines.

lengths above 200 mm, steps of 20 mm

may be used.

3.3 The tolerances for form and position shall be accoraing to Tgrade of accuracy to IS : 2102 (Part 2)General
tolerances for dimensions and form and position: Part 2 General tolerances for form and position (second
revision)*(under
preparation)
.
3.4 The internal

screw threads:

threads shall conform to 6H tolerance


Part 4 Tolerancing
system.

of IS : 4218 (Part 4)-1976 Specification

for IS0 metric

4. Material
4.1 Type A pins (unhardened)
carbon and carbon-manganese
4.2 Type B pins (hardened)

shall be manufactured
from free cutting steel to IS : 4431-1978 Specification
free-cutting steel ($rst revision).
shall be made from steel having a minimum

tensile strength

of 600 N/mm2.

5. Hardness - Type B pins shall have a surface hardness of 60 f 2 HRC [see IS : 1586-1968 Method
Rockwell hardness test (B and C scales) for steel yirst revision)].

118

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

for

FASTENERS-P,ART

for

IS :10248 - 1982
6. Designation
6.1 Cylindrical pins with internal threads shall be designated by the name, type (A or R), nominal
tolerance on nominal diameter, nominal length, and the number of the standard.

diameter

Example:
A cylindrical pin with internal thread, Type A of a nominal diameter dl = 6 mm, tolerance
nominal diameter as m 6 and nominal length I = 20 mm shall be designated as:
Cylindrical
7. Workmanship

and Finish -

on

Pin A6m6 X 20 IS : 10248

All pins shall be manufactured

free from burrs, scales and tool marks.

8. Sampling
and Acceptance
Criteria Unless ,otherwise agreed to between the purchaser
and the
manufacturer,
the method of sampling and acceptance criteria shall be in accordance with IS : 2614- 1969
Methods for sampling of fasteners cfirst revision); except for major and minor defects (see 8.1) and acceptable
quality levels (AQL) (see 8.2) listed in this standard.
8.1 Major and minor

8.2 Acceptable
below:

defects are given below:

Quality Levels (AQL) -

The acceptable

levels for pins covered in this standard

shall be as given

>pjFpiq
Acceptable

quality levels (AQL) percent

Note - For loosening the cylindrical pins, screws with minimum property class 10.9 are required. For cylindrical pins with lengths
above 6 X do, there is a possibility that even with screw of property class 10.9, the force required may go beyond yield point of the screw.

9. General Requirements
9.1 Unless the purchaser has specified specific treatment at the time of making enquiry or at the time of placing
order, the pins shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition and provided with a thin film of oil to protect against
rust.
10. Packing - The cylinderical pins with internal threads shall be packed in cartons or boxes in quantities of 10,
25, 50 or 100. The size, quantity and the manufacturers
name or trade-mark shall be clearly indicated on the
cartons or boxes.
11. ISI Certification

Marking -

Details available

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

Cylindrical pins with internal threads are used as dowel pins in blind holes. The pins are provided with a
flat or small groove along the length to facilitate escape of air from the blind hole for easy driving in of the pins.
When required to be withdrawn, from the blind holes, the pins are extracted with the help of internal threads
provided therein.
In the preparation

of the standard,

DIN 7979-1977 Parallel


HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

considerable

pins with internal

FASTENERS-PART

assistance

has been derived from:

threads issued by Deutsches

lnstitut

fur Normung.
119

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION C
Nails

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS :123 - 1972
Indian

Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
STEEL COUNTERSUNK
HEAD WIRE NAILS

( Second

Revision )

_--p

.~__ -1. Scope -- Requirements

of steel countersunk

head wire nails.

2. Material - Nails shall be manufactured


from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification for
mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 550
MPa and satisfying bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions and Tolerances-The
according to Tables 1 to 4.

dimensions

and tolerances

of the countersunk

3.1 The bend of shank as shown in Fig. 1 shall not exceed 1.0 percent
3.2 Eccentricity

head type wire nails shall be

of total length.

and ovality of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be as below:

For nails with shank diameter


For nails with shank diameter

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

L 2.00 mm; maximum


< 2.00 mm; maximum

AND

TOLERANCES

OF STEEL

12 percent
14 percent

of shank diameter,
of shank diameter,

COUNTERSUNK

HEAD

WIRE

MUX
MUX

NAILS

1.25 TO 1.40 mm)

(SIZE

( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

2.75 d
62= 1 TO 1.5

D =

Size d
(Shank

Head Diameter

Length

Din)

Basic

Tolerance

1.25
1.40

Approximate
Number

Basic

Tolerarice

Basic

f 0.04

3.4

df 0.17

20

1.0

5 060

f 0.04

3.8

f 0.17

20

1.0

3 040

Tolerance

Note - The number of nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable


table is intended only for guidance to the purchaser.

HANDBOOK

of Nails/kg

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

extent. The figure given in the

123

IS : 723 - 1972
_TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES
OF STEEL COUNTERSUNK
(SIZE 1.60 TO 1.80 mm)

HEAD

WIRE NAILS

( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

--D= 2-S
e

Size d
(Shank Dia)

Length
L

Tolerance

4.0

f 0.2

1 TO 1*5 d

Head Diameter
D

Basic

1.80

f 0.04

4.5

Basic

Approximate
Number of Nails/kg

Tolerance

15

It 1.0

3 940

20

1.0

2 710

25

1.2

2 110

25

* 1.2

1 720

30

I 410

f 0.23
1.2

Note - The number of nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable


table is intended only for guidance to the purchaser.

extent. The figure given in the

I
1

OF

FIG.
4. Designation-The
standard.

countersunk

BEND OF SHANK

head nails shall be designated

by the size, length and the number

of this

Example:
# countersunk

head nail of size 4.00 mm and length


designated as:

100 mm shall be

Nail 4 X 100 IS : 723


124

HANDBOOK.ON

INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :I23 - 1972
a
TABLE 3

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

FOR STEEL COUNTERSUNK

HEAD WIRE NAILS

(SIZE 2.00 TO 2.80 mm)


( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

Dz 2d

e = 1 TO 1*5 cl

Size d
(Shank Dia)
Basic

2.00

Head Diameter
D
Basic

Tolerance

f 0.04

4.00

Tolerance

Approximate
Number of Nails/kg

Length
L

Basic

Tolerance

25

1.2

I 470

30

1.2

1 170

40

1.5

840

50

f 2.1

650

f 0.2

2.24

f 0.04

4.5

f 0.23

40

1.5

700

2.50

f 0.05

5.0

f 0.25

50

f 2.1

550

2.80

f 0.06

5.6

f 0.28

60

f 2.1

350

Note - The number of nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable


table is intended only for guidance to the purchaser.

extent. The figure given in the

5. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and the ends shall be pointed
to conform to the dimensions given in Tables 1 to 4. The heads shall be properly formed, chequered and
concentric with the shank.
6. Finish finished.

Unless otherwise

specified by the purchaser

countersunk

head wire nails shall be supplied

bright

7. Test

7.1 Bend Test - Steel countersunk head wire nails, selected according to 9.2, when cold shall not break or
develop cracks, when doubled over either by pressure or by blow from a hammer until1 the internal radius is equal
to the diameter of the test piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing -

Nails of different

sizes and types shall be packed in separate

containers.

8.1 Nails including25 mm in length and below shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box
shall be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
8.2 Nails above 25 mm and below 80 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

125

--.-------..A

IS : 723 - 1972
TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND

TOLERANCES
(SIZE

FOR

STEEL

COUNTERSUNK

HEAD

WIRE

NAILS

3.15 TO 10 mm)

( Clauses 3 and 5 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

D= l-ad
e=l

Size

TO 1*5d

Head Diameter

Length

(Shank Dia)

Approximate
Number

Tolerance

Basic

Tolerance

Basic

3.15

f 0.06

5.7

f 0.29

60

3.55

5 0.06

6.4

4.00

f 0.06

1.2

I
f 0.32

I----
4.50

8. I

f 0.06

9.0

f 0.45

I
f 2.6

100

f 0.41

230

f 2.1
I

Tolerance

80

f 0.36

Basic

of Nails/kg

140

f 3.4

90

I
90

f 3.1

90

100

f 3.4

80

125

f 3.8

65

100

* 3.4

60

125

& 3.8

50

150

f 3.8

6.30

f 0.06

11.3

1 f 0.57
I

8.00

f 0.06

14.4

f 0.06

18.0

150

30

If3.81

I
200

f 4.4

12

225

f 4.4

10

f 0.72

I
10.00

I
f 0.90

I
250

I
I

f 4.4

Note - The number of nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable


table is intended only for.guidance
to the purchaser.

extent. The figure given in the

8.3 Nails 80 mm and above in length shall be packed in wrappings of double gunny bags, the weight of the each
package being I5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in cases of bituminized canvas or hessian bags; the net weight
of each package shall be 50 kg.
9. Scale of Sampling

and Criteria for Conformity

9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
126

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

under essentially

FASTENERS-PART

IS:723

- 1972

9.2

Selection qf Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 ofTable 5. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.

9.3 Visual and Dimensional


9.3.1

Number

manufacturing

Characteristics

of tests and criteria for canfrmity

defects, dimensions

All the nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined

for

and ffnish.

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics,mentioned
in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 5.

TABLE

SCALE

OF SAMPLING

AND CRITERIA

( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2 and

Approximate
Number of Nails

FOR CONFORMITY

9.4. I )

For Visual and Dimensional


Characteristic

For Bend Test

in the Lot
1

-R Sub-sample

Permissible

to be Selected

Number of
Defective Nails

Size

Number of
Defective Nails

(1)

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

up to 1 000
1001 to3000
3 001 to IO000
IO 001to 35 000
35 001 and above

32
50
80
125

5
7
IO
14

0
0
0

200

21

8
13
20
32
50

I
2

Note -- The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the tikes. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or l&s defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

9.4

Bend

Test

9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 5. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according
to 9.3.1 and found satisfactory.

The lot shall be considered as confoiming


pass this test does not exceed the corresponding

to the requirements of bend test if the number of nails failing to


acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 5.

9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

10. Marking

of nails shall be marked

All packages

a)

Manufacturers

b)

Type of nail,
Size (shank diameter)

d)

Net weight of the package.

HANDBOOK

Marking

ON INDUSTRIAL

of the specification

with the following

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.

information;

name or trade-mark,

c)

10.1 ISI Certification

to the requirements

and length of nail, and

Details available

FASTENERS-PART

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

127

IS : 723 - 1972
EXPLANATORY

changes

The specification for mild steel wire nails was first revised in 1961. In the present revision the following
have been made:
a)

The angle of countersunk

b)

Nail head diameter has been changed to 2dfor shank diameters ranging between 2.0 to 2.8 mm and to
1.8d for shank diameters above 2.8 mm.

c)

Tolerances

d)

Provision

e)

The sampling plan has been suitably


4 percent to 7 percent.

f)

The present revision covers only countersunk


separate standards, as follows:
IS
IS
IS
IS
IS

128

NOTE

:
:
:
:
:

for eccentricity
for galvanized

6730-1972
6732-1972
6733-1972
6734-1972
6738-1972

has been increased

from 90 to 120.

and ovality of nail heads has been specified.


finish nails has been deleted and plain finish has been specified.
modified to permit allowable

percentage

of defective nails from

head wire nails. The other types are being covered by

Felt nails
Double point nails
Wall and roofing nails
Cut lath and lath nails
Panel pins and lost head nails

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 725 - 1961
Indian Standard

FOR COPPER

SPECIFICATION

WIRE

NAILS

( Revised )
D. Foreword
Il.1 The revised Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 25 November 1961, after
the draft finalized by the Builders Hardware Sectional Committee had been approved by the Building Division
Council.
D.2 This standard was first issued in 1956 specifying the shank diameters of various types of copper wire nails in
SWG,(Standard
Wire Gauge), lengths in inches and packing requirement in pounds. In view of the adoption of
the metric system of weights and measures by the Government
of India, revision of this standard was felt
necessary by all concerned interests. During working of this standard certain manufacturing
difficulties also
:ame to light. This revision, therefore,,provides
for tolerance on taper length of nails and relaxes tolerance on size
of head in case of rose-head boat nails and specifies the dimensions and packing requirements
of copper wire
nails in the metric system.
3.3 The Sectional Committee responsible for the preparation of this standard has taken into consideration
the
views of producers, consumers and technologists and has related the standard to the manufacturing
and trade
>ractices followed in the country in this field. Due weightage has also been given to the need for international
coordination among standards prevailing in different countries of the world.
I.4 Wherever a reference to any Indian Standard
.he latest version of the standard.
I.5 Metric system has been adopted
n this system,.

appears in this specification

in India and all quantfiies

and dimensions

it shall be taken as a reference to


in this standard

have been given

I.6 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
Jalue, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test or analysis, shall be rounded off in accordance with
IS : 2-1960 Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the
-ounded off value should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
I.7 This standard is intended chiefly to cover the technical
lot include all the necessary provisions of a contract.

provisions

relating to copper wire nails, and it does

I. Scope
1.1 This standard
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)

covers the following

types of copper wire nails:

Rose-head boat nails square shank, square point (see Fig.l),


Countersunk-head
boat nails square shank, sharp square point (see Fig. 2),
Countersunk-head
boat nails, square shank, round point (see Fig. 3),
Wrought tacks (see Fig. 4), and
Cut-lath nails (Cut tacks) (see Fig. 5).
L
2.5 0
1.
DSQ
FIG. 1

ROSE-HEAD

t
SQUARE

BOAT NAIL,

SHANK,

SQUAREPo1NT

L
O-75

2$r*Z

250_

--I*
, OSQ

Jj;0

2-50
?

FIG. 2 COUNTERSUNK-HEAP
BOAT
NAIL, SQUARE SHANK SHARP
SQUARE POINT

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

:I::
t

FIG. 3 COUNTERSUNK-HEAD
BOAT NAIL,
SQUARE SHANK, ROUND POINT

129

IS :725 - 1961

FIG. 4

WROUGHT

TACK

FIG. 5 CUT-LATH
(CUTTACK)

NAIL

2. Material
2.1 The wire used for nails shall have copper content not less than 99.2 percent and shall have a minimum
ultimate tensile strength of 28.0 kg/mm* with a maximum elongation of 10 percent on a length of 50 mm. The
wire shall withstand the following bend test:
Suitable test pieces when cold shall not break or develop crack when doubled over, either by pressure or
by blows from a hammer, until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece and the sides are
parallel.
2.2 The tin used in finishing

of copper nails shall have a purity of 99 percent.

3. Manufacture
3.1 The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks on the neck. They shall be uniform in section,
straight, free from wasters, and shall have sharp points. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with
the shank.
4. Dimensions

and Tolerances

4.1 The dimensions of the different types of copper nails shall satisfy the respective requirements
them in Fig. I to Fig. 5 and Table 1.

specified for

4.2 Tolerances
4.2.1 The maximum permissible variation from the dimensions
cut-lath nails (cut tacks) shall be as follows:
Size of
Shank,
Across
Flats

given in Table 1 for copper nails other than

Tolerance
r

Head Dia or
Side of
Square
percent

Size of Shank
Across Flats,

5.00 to 2.50

f 7%

f 0.05

2.50

f 7%

f 0.05

Less than 2.50

It 7%

f 0.04

mm

4.2.2 In the case of cut-lath


Table 1 shall be as follows:

Length,
L

DSQ
mm

nails (cut tacks) the maximum

Tolerance

permissible

mm
- 0.0
+ 1.5
- 0.0
+ 1.0
- 0.0
+ 1.0

variation

from the dimensions

given in

on

/\

Head Dia
Percent
f5

Size of Shank,
(Dia)
mm
f 0.10

130

:ffb

4.2.3The tolerance
provided

Length,

on taper length (2.50) of the different types of copper


the overall length (L) of the nail is within the tolerance permitted.

HANDBOOK

wire nails shall be ;;;

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :725 - 1961
5. Finish
5.1 Copper nails shall be finished bright unless specifically
free from burrs and sharp edges except at the points.

required by the purchaser

5.1.1 When copper nails are tinned, the tin coating shall cover the nails completely,
and uniform.

to be tinned. They shall be


and shall be even, smooth
*

TABLE 1
Type of
Nail

(1)
Rose-head
boat nails,
square
shank,
Square point

DIMENSIONS
Length
L

AND APPROXIMATE
COUNT OF COPPER NAILS
( Clauses 4.1, 4.2.1 and 4.2.2 l
Depth
Size of
Head
of
Shank,
Din
Head
Across
or side
of
Flats,
Square
DSQ

6Q
50
50
50
45
45
45
40
40
40
35
35
35
30
30
30
25
25
25
25

(3)
mm
5.00
4.00
5.00
4.00
3.15
5.00
4.00
3.15
4.50
4.00
3.15
2.50
4.00
3.15
2.50
4.00
3:15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
3.15
2.50
2.00
5.00
2.50
2.00
1.60

(4)
mm
12.5
10.0
12.5
10.0
7.9
12.5
10.00
7.9
11.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
10.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
7.9
6.2
5.0
12.5
6.2
5.0
4.0

(5)
mm
2.5
2.0
2.5
2.0
1.6
2.5
2.0
1.6
2.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
2.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
1.0
1.6
1.2
I.0
1.6
1.2
I.0
2.5
1.2
1.0
0.8

125
100
100
100
90
80
80
70
70
60
60
50
50
40
30
25
20

5.00
5.00
4.00
3.15
3.55
5.00
3.15
5.00
3.15
4.00
3.15
3.55
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15
3.15

12.5
12.5
10.0
7.9
8.9
12.5
7.9
12.5
7.9
10.0
7.9
8.9
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.9
7.9

3.8
3.8
3.0
2.4
2.7
3.8
2.4
3.8
2.4
3.0
2.4
2.7
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4
2.4

(2)
mm

110
110
100
100
100
90
90
90
80
80
::
70
70
70
60
60
60

Countersunkhead boat
nails, square
shank, sharp
square point

Approx
No. of
Nails
fy

kg
(6)
40
65
50
70
I10
55
80
120
80
90
145
220
100
160
240

110
170
260
440
220
330
550
220
380
640
270
430
750
330
500

900
400
600
I 000
160
890
I 000,
1 760
50
70
120
100
60
130
70
160
115
170
170
210
290
370
420
375
Continued

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

131

IS : 725 - 1961
TABLE 1
Type of
Nail

DIMENSIONS

AND APPROXIMATE

Length
L

Size of
Shank,
Across
Flats,

COUNT OF COPPER

NAILS

Conrd

Depth
of
Head

DSQ

Head
Dia
or side
of
Square

(2)
mm

(3)
mm

(4)
mm

(5)
mm

(6)

Countersunkhead boat
nails, square
shank, round
point

40
25

2.50
2.50

6.2
6.2

1.2
1.2

480
780

Wrought
tacks

30
25
20
20

2.00
2.00
2.00
I .60

6.0
6.0
6.0
4.8

0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8

I
I

800
980
230
470

1.80
I.80
1.80
1.60

5.4
5.4
5.4
4.8

0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8

I
2
4
4

820
000
500
950

0)

Approx
No. of
Nails
per kg

Diameter
20
I5
IO
IO

Cut-lath
nails
(cut tacks)

Note - The number


guidance to the purchaser.

6. Insuestion

of nails per kilogram

and Manufacturers

is likely to vary to a considerable

extent, The figures given in co16 are intended

only for

Certificate

6.1 The purchaser or his authorized representative shall, where desired, be granted
finished goods prior to despatch from the manufacturers
works.
6.2 The manufacturer
shall supply
requirements
of this standard.

on request,

a certificate

stating

facilities for inspection

that the copper

nails comply

of

with the

6.2.1 The manufacturers certificate shall not be necessary if the package of nails bears IS1 Certification
(see 9.1.1) as the mark itself is a certificate of compliance.

Mark

6.3 The purchaser shallbe at liberty to reject any goods purporting


do not comply with any of the requirements
of this standard.

if they

to have been supplied to this standard

7. Packing
7.1 Unless specified otherwise.
2.5 kg.

copper nails shall be packed in cardboard

boxes, the net weight of each box being

8. Sample Size and Criterion for Conformity


8.1 Lot - In any consignment, all the packages of copper wire nails of the same type and size manufactured
the same time shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.

at

8.2 Selection of Packages and Nails


8.2.1 The number of packages to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size ofthe lot and shall
be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2.
8.2.2 The number of nails to be selected at random from each packa@ shall depend upon the length of nails in
the package and shall be as given in co1 3 to 5 of Table 2.
8.3 Number of Tests - All the copper wire nails selected as in 8.2.2 shall be examined
(see 3), dimensions (see 4) and finish (see 5).

for manufacturing

defects

8.4 Criterion for Conformity - The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of this standard if
the number of nails failing in any one or more of the requirements
mentioned in 8.3 does not exceed the
corresponding
number mentioned in the appropriate
column, from co1 6 to 8, of Table 2.
9. Marking
9.1 All packages

ofnails shall be marked

a) Manufacturers
b) Type of nail,
132

with the following

information:

name or trade-mark,

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 725 - 1961

TABLE 2

Number of
Packages
to be
Selected

Number of
Packages
in the lot

(1)

(2)

2to
8
9,, 15
16 ,, 25
26 ,, 40
41 ,, 65
66 and above

2
3
4
5
7
10

Note -

The sampling

SAMPLE

SIZE AND CRITERION FOR CONFORMITY


( Clauses 8.2. I, 8.2.2 fnd 8.4 )

Number of Nails to be
Selected from each Package
if the length of the Nails is
Below
From
80 mm

Permissible

Number of

Defective Nails if the


Length of Nails is
)

25 mm

25 to
80 mm

and
Above

25 mm

25 to
80 mm

(3)
25
25
25
25
25
25

(4)
IO
IO
10
IO
IO
10

(5)
5
5
5
5
5
5

(6)
4
6
7
9
II
15

(7)
2
3
3
4
6
7

plan given here is such that lots with 4 percent

oi less defectives

would be- accepted most

80 mm
and
Above
(8)

of the time.

c) Size (length and dia or side of square of shank) of nail,


d) Finish of nail, and
e) Net weight of contents.
9.1.1 Each package

of nails may also be marked

with the ISI Certification

Mark.

Note - The use of ISI Certification Mark is governed by the provisions of the IndianStandards
Institution(Certification
Marks) Act, 1952
and the Rules and Regulations made thereunder. Details of condtions, under which a licence for the use of the IS1 Certification Mark may be
granted to manufacturers
or processors, may be obtained from the Indian Standards Institution.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6730 - 1972

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
F.OR
FELT NAILS

1. Scope

Covers the requirements

of felt nails.

2. Material - Felt nails shall be manufactured


from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification
[or mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate fensile strength of
550 MPa and satisfying the bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions

and Tolerances

Shall be as per Table

3.1 The eccentricity and ovality tolerances


14 percent of shank diameter, MUX.
1. Designation

1.

of the centre of the felt nails with respect of axis of the shank shall be

The felt nails shall be designated

by the size, length and the number

of this standard.

Example:
Felt Nail 2 X 12 IS : 6730
5. General Requirements
- The felt nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife
marks on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp
point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish

- The felt nails shall be supplied

plain finished.

7. Test
7.1 Bend T&t - Suitable test pieces of felt nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled over
Either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece
and the sides are parallel.
6. Packing

The felt nails of different

sizes shall be packed in separate

containers.

6.1 The felt nails below 25 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box shall
be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
8.2 The nails above 25 mm and up to 50 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of
:ach box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50
kg.
9. Scale of Sampling

and Criteria

for Conforrpity

9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall. be grouped together to constitute a lot.

under essentially

9.2 Selection of Nails - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of the
packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional

Characteristics

9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity


manufacturing
defects, dimensions and finish.

All the nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined

for

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in ~01.3 of Table 2.

134

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6730 -1972

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

OF FELT NAILS

(SIZE 2.00 TO 3.55 mm)

( Clause 3 )

All dimensions

in millimetres.

e=lTO1*5d

FOR

d=2

TO 3.15 mm

D=3=ld
e=lTOl*Eid

FOR

2.80

3.15

3.55

f 0.06

f 0.06

f 0.06

9.2

10.4

11.0

Note - The number of nails per kilogram


intended only for guidance to the purchaser.

f 0.46

f 0.52

f 0.55

d=3*55

mm

40

1.5

570

20

1.0

1 030

25

1.2

810

30

1.2

660

40

1.5

385

45

1.8

330

50

f 2.,1

285

50

f2.1

230

is likely to vary to a considerable

extent. The figures given in the table are

IS :6730 - 1972

TABLE

SCALE

OF SAMPLING
(Clauses

Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot

Visual and Dimensional


Characteristics
A

FOR CONFORMITY

Bend Test

Number of Nails
to be Selected

Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

32
50
80
125
200

5
7
10
14
21

8
13
20
32
50

0
0
0

(1)
Upto
1001 to
3 001 to
10 001 to.
35 001 and

AND CRITERIA

9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 )

1000
3000
10000
35 000
above

e Sub-sample
Size

Number of
Defective Nails

1
2

Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

9.4 Bend Test


9.4.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number
to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 2.
9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

10. Marking

of nails shall be marked

All packages

a)

Manufacturers

b)

The type of nail;

name or trade-mark,

c)

The size (shank diameter)

d)

Net weight of the package.

10.1 ISI Certification

to the requirements

Marking

of the specification

with the following

of nails failing

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.

information;

if any;

and length of nail, and

Details available

EXPLANATORY

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

The above standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for
mild steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
standard the following additional features have been incorporated:

136

a)

Tolerances

for eccentricity

b)

The sampling
4 to 7; and

c)

Provision

and ovality of nail heads have been specified;

plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable

percentage

of defective nails from

for extra large head felt nails have been deleted.


HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6732 - 1972

Indian Standqrd
SPECIFICATION
FOR
DOUBLE POINT NAILS
.

Scope -

Covers the requirements

of steel double

point nails.

. Material - Nails shall be manufactured


from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 280-1962 Specification for
lild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate tensile strength of 550
APa and satisfying bend test given in 7.1.
. Dimensions

and Tolerances

The dimensions

and tolerances

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND TOLERANCES


All

of the nails shall be according

to Table

1.

OF DOUBLE POINT NAILS (SIZE 1.80 TO 2.50 mm)

dimensions in millimetres.

WI&-L
e = 1 TO 1.5 d

1. Designation

-The

double point nails shall be designated

-Y

by the size, length and the number ofthis standard.

Example:
A double

point nail of size 1.80 mm and length 35 mm shall be designated

as:

Nail 1.80 X 35 IS : 6732


i. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
)n the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp point.
i. Finish

The nails shall be supplied

plain finished.

1. Test
1.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of dpuble point nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when
doubled over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of
.he test piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing
8.1 Nails of different sizes shall be packed in different containers. Nails shall be packed in cardboard boxes and
the net weight of each box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each
bag shall be 50 kg.

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

137

IS : 6732 - 1972
9. Scale of Sampling and Criteria for Conformity
9.1 Lot - In any consignment all. the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.

under essentially

9.2 Selection of Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional

Characteristics

9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity manufacturing


defects, dimensions and finish.

All the nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined

for

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 2.
9.4 Bend Test
9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number
to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 2.
9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

TABLE

SCALE

to the requirements

OF SAMPLING

of the specification

AND CRITERIA

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.

FOR CONFORMITY

Visual and Dimensional


Characteristics

Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot

of nails failing

Bend Test

a
Number of Nails
to be Selected

Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

32
50
80
125
200

5
7
10
14
21

8
13
20
32
50

0
0
0

(1)

Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails

Sub-sample
Size

.!

up
1001
3 001
IO 001
35 001

to
to
to
to
and

1000
3000
10 000
35 000
above

I
2

Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or !ess defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

10. Marking -

All packages

of nails shall be marked

a)

Manufacturers

name or trade-mark,

b)

The type of nail;

c)

Size (shank

d)

Net weight of the package.

diameter)

with the following

information:

if any;

and length; and

10.1 ISI Certification Marking -

Details available

EXPLANATORY

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

The standard was originally a part of IS : 723-1972 Specification for steel countersunk
head wire nails
(second revision). Subsequent
to the revision of this standard, individual standards have been prepared for
different types of nails. In the present revision the following changes have been made:

138

a)

The name has been changed

b)

The sampling
to 7 percent.

c)

Provision

from round

wire dowels with double

plan has been modified to permit allowable percentage

for galvanized

points to double

point nails.
1

of defective nails from 4 percent

finish has been deleted and plain finish has been specified.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6733 - 1972
.

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
WALL AND ROOFING NAILS
1. Scope -

Covers the requirements

of wall and roofing

nails.

2. Material - Nails shall be manufactured


from St42 and St50 steel conforming to IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for
wrought steels for general engineering purposes and satisfying bend test as in 7.1.
3. Dimensions

and Tolerances

TABLE 1

These shall be as given in Table

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

1.

OF WALL AND ROOFING NAILS

(SIZE 4.00 TO 6.30 mm)


( Clause 3 )
All dimensions

in millimetres.

&

e-

-eI
---

h
d@
t

II= 2*&d
e=l

Al

e=l

TO 1*5d

TOlaSd

Eccentricity and ovality


diameter, MUX.

of the centre of the nail head from axis of shank shall be 14 percent

HANDBOOK

FASTENERS-PART

ON INDUSTRIAL

of shank

139

IS : 6733 - 1972
4. Designation
standard.

The wall and roofing

nails shall be designated

by the size, length and the number

of this

Examples:
Wall Nail 4 X 30 IS : 6733
Roofing

Nail 5.6 X 50 IS : 6733

5. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp point.
The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -

The nails shall be supplied

plain finished.

7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of nails when cold shall not break or crack when doubled over either by
pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece and sides are
parallel.
8. Packing

Nails of different

sizes and types shall be packed in separate

containers.

8.1 Nails above 30 mm and below 80 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
9. Scale of Sampling

and Criteria

for Conformity

9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.

under essentially

9.2 Selection of Nails - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of the
lot and shall be in accordance with co1 1 and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of the
packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity manufacturing
defects, dimensions and finish.

All the nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined

for

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 2.
9.4 Bend Test
9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
9.3.1 and found satisfactory.

TABLE

SCALE

OF SAMPLING

AND CRITERIA

FOR CONFORMITY

( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and9.4.2)


Approximate
Number of Nails
in the Lot

(1)
up to

1001to

1000

3000
3 001 to 10 000
10001 to 35 000
35 001 and above

Visual and Dimensional


Characteristics
6
/
3
Number of Nails
Permissible
to be Selected
Number of
Defective Nails

Bend Test

Sub-sample
Size

Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

32
50
80
125
200

5
7
10
I4
21

8
13
20
32
50

0
0
0
I
2

Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

140

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6733
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number
to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 2.
9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

10. Marking

of nails shall be marked

All packages

a)

Manufacturers

name or trade-mark,

b)

The type of nail;

c)

The size (shank diameter)

d)

Net weight of the package.

10.1 IS1 Certification

to the requirements

Marking

of the specification

with the following

- 1972

of nails failing

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.

information:

if any;

and length of nail; and

Details available

EXPLANATORY

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

The above standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for
mild steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
standard the following additional features have been incorporated:

4 Tolerances for eccentricity and ovality of nail heads have been specified;
b) Raw material has been specified as St42 or St50 steel instead of mild steel according to IS : 280-1962;
and

c) The sampling plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable percentage of defective nails to 7
from 4.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

141

IS :6734 - 1972
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
CUT LATH AND LATH NAILS

1. Scope -

Requirements

of cut lath and lath nails made of steel.

2. Material - The nails shall be manufactured


from mild steel wire conforming
for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised)having
a minimum
MPa and satisfying the bend test given in 7.1.
3. Dimensions

and Tolerances

3.1 The eccentricity


be as given below:

Shall be as given in Table

and ovality tolerances

to IS : 280-1962 Specification
ultimate tensile strength of 550

1.

of the centre of the nail head with respect to the axis of the shank shall

For nails with shank diameter

2 2 mm; 12 percent

of shank diameter,

MUX.

For nails with shank diameter

< 2 mm; 14 percent

of shank diameter,

MUX.

4. Designation

The nails shall be designated

by the size, length and number

of this standard.

Examples:
Cut Lath Nail 1.80 X 15 IS : 6734
Lath Nail
2.00 X 40 IS : 6734
5. General Requirements - The nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife marks
on the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp points.
The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -

Nails shall be supplied

plain finished.

7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled over
either by pressure or by blows from a hammer until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test piece
and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing

Nails of different

sizes and types shall be packed in separate

containers.

8.1 Nails below 25 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each box shall be 0.5
kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
8.2 Nails above 25 mm and below 40 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net weight of each
box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag shall be 50 kg.
9. Scale of Sampling

and Criteria for Conformity

9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of nails of the same type and size manufactured
similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.

under essentially

9.2 Selection of Samples - The number of nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend on the size of
the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 I and 2 of Table 2. The nails shall be selected from at least 25 percent of
the packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional

Characteristics

9.3.1 Number of tests and criteria for conformity


manufacturing
defects, dimensions and finish.

All the nails selected BS in 9.2 shall be examined

for

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
nails examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 2.

142

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6734

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND

TOLERANCES

(SIZE

OF CUT LATH

AND

LATH

- 1972

NAILS

1.25 TO 2.24 mm)


( Clause 3 )

All dimensions

in millimetres.

D=3d

CUT LATH NAIL

D=28d
e=l
TO 1*5d

LATH NAIL

Size d
(Shank

Basic

Head Diameter

Diameter)

1 Tolerance

Basic

Approximate

Length

Tolerance

Number

Basic

of Nails

Cut Lath

1 Tolerance

perkg
Lath

percent
I
1.25

1 i

0.04

3.8

f 0.19

10

0.24
0.27

1 i 1.0

9 770

4100

2 240

1.0

10

1.0

15

1.0

* 0.4

Note -

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

20

f 1.0

20

f 1.0 I

2 310
I

370

5.6

The number of nails per kilogram

table are intended

0.25

3 280

only for guidance

is likely to vary to a considerable

extent. The figures given in the

to the purchaser.

FASTENERS-PART

143

IS : 6734 - 1972
TABLE

SCALE

OF SAMPLING
( Clauses

Approximate
Number

AND

CRITERIA

9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and

9.4.2

FOR

CONFORMITY

For Visual and Dimensional

of Nails

For Bend Test

Chaqcteristics

in the Lot

35 001

Permissible
Number of
Defective Nails

Number of
Defective Nails

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

32
50
80
125
200

5
7
10
14
21

8
13
20
32
50

0
0
0
1
2

(1)

Upto
1001to
3 001 to
10001 to

rSub-sample
Size

to be Selected

1000
3000

10ooo

35 000
and above

Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

9.4 Bend

Test

9.4.1 Number oftests and criteriafor conformity - The number of nails to be selected for carrying out bend
test shall be according to co1 4 Table 2. These nails shall be selected from those already inspected according to
9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number
to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 2.
9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

10. Marking

of nails shall be marked

All packages

a)

Manufacturers

b)

The type of nail,

of the specification

with the following

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.

information:

name or trade-mark,

c)

Size (shank

d)

Net weight of the package.

10.1 IS/ CertzjYcation

to the requirements

of nails failing

diameter)

Marking

and length of nail, and

Details available

EXPLANATORY

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

Subsequent
to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for mild steel wire nails (revised),
splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail, the above standard has been
prepared. In this the following additional features have been incorporated:

144

a)

Tolerances

b)

The sampling plan has been suitably modified to permit allowable


4 percent to 7 percent.

for eccentricity

and ovality

of nail heads have been specified.

HANDBOOK

percentage

ON INDUSTRIAL

of defective nails from

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6738 - 1972
Indian StaFdard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
PINS AND LOST HEAD

PANEL

Scope -- Covers the requirements

NAILS

of panel pins and lost head nails made of steel.

Material - Panel pins and lost head nails shall be manufactured from mild steel wire conforming to IS : 2807
52 Specification for mild steel wire for general engineering purposes (revised) having a minimum ultimate
sile strength of 550 MPa and satisfying the bend test given in 7.1.
Dimensions

and Tolerances

rABLE

As given in Table

DIMENSIONS

1.

AND TOLERANCES

OF PANEL

All dimensions

in millimetres.

PINS AND LOST HEAD

D=l*4d
e=l TO 1*5d
d5

d>

1.4

Nom

Head Diameter

Length

Tolerance

Basic

Approximate
Number of Bright Nails
P er 1g

Tolerance

Basic

Tolerance

1.00
1.25
1.40
1.40

*
f
f
f

0.04
0.04
0.04
0.04

1.4
1.8
2.0
2.0

f
f
*
f

0.07
0.09
0.10
0.10

12
15
20
25

f 1.0

1.60
1.60
2.t.Y
2.80

+
f
*
f

0.04
0.04
0.04
0.06

2.2
2.2
2.8
3.9

f
f
f
f

0.11
0.11
0.14
0.20

30
40
50
60

f
f
*
f

3.15
4.00
4.00

=t 0.06
f 0.06
ic 0.06

4.4
6.3
6.3

f 0.22
f 0.32
f 0.32

70
80
100

Panel Pins

10
6
3
3

f 1.0
* 1.0
f 1.2

For nails with shank diameter


For nails with shank diameter
4. Designation
this standard.

780
380
960
080

1 890
I 580
770
400

f 2.6
f 2.6
f 3.4

200
95
76
i

-I-

and ovality tolerances

Lost Head
Nails

1.2
1.5
2.1
2.1

Note - The number of pins or nails per kilogram is likely to vary to a considerable
i n the table are intended only for guidance to the purchaser.

1 The eccentricity
as given below:

1.4

Lost Head Nail

Panel Pin
Size d
(Shank Diameter)

NAILS

extent. The 1igure given

of the centre of the nail head with respect to the axis of the shank shall

> 2 mm; maximum


< 2 mm; maximum

12 percent of shank diameter,


14 percent of shank diameter,

The panel nails and the lost head nails shall be designated

MUX
Max

by the size. length and the number of

Example:

Panel Pin
1.4 X 25 IS : 6738
Lost Head Nail 1.6 X 40 IS : 6738

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

145

IS :6738 - 1972
5. General Requirements - The pins and nails shall be machine made and may have die marks and feeding knife
marks pn the shank. They shall be uniformly circular in section, straight, free from wasters and shall have sharp
point. The heads shall be properly formed and concentric with the shank.
6. Finish -

The pins and nails shall be supplied

plain finished.

7. Test
7.1 Bend Test - Suitable test pieces of pins or nails when cold shall not break or develop cracks, when doubled
over either by pressure or by blows from a hammer, until the internal radius is equal to the diameter of the test
piece and the sides are parallel.
8. Packing

The pins and nails of different

sizes and types shall be pacKed in separate

containers.

8.1 The pins and nails including 25 mm in length and below shall be packed in cardboard boxes andthe net
weight of each box shall be 0.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags and the net weight of each bag
shall be 50 kg.
8.2 The pins and nails above 25 mm and below 80 mm in length shall be packed in cardboard boxes and the net
weight of each box shall be 2.5 kg. The nails may also be supplied in gunny bags, and the net weight of each bag
shall be 50 kg.
8.3 The nails of 80 mm and above in length shall be packed in wrappings of double gunny bags, the weight of the
each package being 15 kg. The pins and nails may also be supplied in bituminized canvas or hessian bags, the net
weight of each package shall be 50 kg.
9. Scale of Sampling

and Criteria for Conformity

9.1 Lot - In any consignment all the packages of pins or nails of the same type and size manufactured
essentially similar conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.

under

9.2 S$ection of Pins or Nails - The number of pins or nails to be selected at random from the lot shall depend
on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance with co1 I and 2 of Table 2. The pins or nails shall be selected from
at least 25 percent of the packages.
9.3 Visual and Dimensional Characteristics
9.3.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity - All the pins or nails selected as in 9.2 shall be examined
manufacturing
defects, dimensions and finish.

for

9.3.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of these characteristics if the number of
pins or nails, examined for characteristics
mentioned in 9.3.1 and found defective, does not exceed the
corresponding
acceptance number given in co1 3 of Table 2.

TABLE 2

SCALE OF SAMPLING

AND CRITERIA

FOR CONFORMITY

( Clauses 9.2, 9.3.2, 9.4.1 and 9.4.2 )


Approximate
Number of Pins or
Nails in the Lot

Visual and Dimensional


Characteristics
b
I
Number of Pins or
Permissible
Nails to be Selected
Number of
Defective Pins

Bend Test

Sub-sample
Size

or Nails
(1)
Upto

1000

I 001to 3 000
3001 to 10000
IO 001 to 35 000
35 001 and above

Permissible
Number of
Defective Pins
or Nails

(2)

(3)

(4)

(5)

32
50
80
125
200

5
7
10
14
21

8
13
20
32
50

0
0
0

1
2

Note - The sampling plan accepts the lots containing 7 percent or less defectives in respect of visual and dimensional
characteristics
more than 95 percent of the times. In the case of bend test the lot containing I .5 percent or less defectives will be
accepted more than 95 percent of the times.

9.4 Bend Test


9.4.1 Number of tests and criteriafor conformity-The
number of pins or nails to be selected for carrying out
bend test shall be according to co1 4 of Table 2. These nails or pins shall be selected from those already inspected
according to 9.3.1 and found satisfactory.
146

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :6738 - 1972
9.4.2 The lot shall be considered as conforming to the requirements of bend test if the number ot pins or nails
failing to pass this test does not exceed the corresponding
acceptance number in co1 5 of Table 2.
9.5 The lot shall be considered

as conforming

to the requirements

of the specification

10. Marking

of pins or nails shall be marked

with the following

a)

All packages

Manufacturers

name or trade-mark,

b)

The type of pin or nail;

c)

The size (shank diameter)

d)

Net weight of the package.

10.1 ISI Certification

Marking

if it satisfies 9.3.1 and 9.4.1.


information:

if any;

and length of pin or nail; and

Details available

with the Indian

EXPLANATORY

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

This standard has been prepared subsequent to the decision to revise IS : 723-1961 Specification for mild
steel wire nails (revised), splitting it into six individual standards each covering only one type of nail. In this
standard the following additional features have been incorporated:
a)

Tolerances

b)

The sampling plan has been suitably


4 percent to 7 percent.

HANDBOOK

for eccentricity

ON INDUSTRIAL

and ovality

FASTENERS-PART

of nail heads have been specified; and

modified to permit allowable

percentage

of defective nails from

147

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION D
Keys, Keyways and Cotters

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 2048 - 1983
_.
____ -4

_
Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
PARALLEL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( Second Revision )
1. Scope -

Covers the dimensions

2. Types -

The keys shall be of the following

and tolerances

for parallel

keys and keyways.

types:

Type A Type B Type C Type D


Type E

Type F

Type G
Type H
TypeJ

Keys with both ends round.


Keys with both ends square.
Keys with both ends round with hole for one retaining screw (for sizes 8 X 7 and upwards and
for key lengths above the stepped line in Table 4).
- Keys with both ends square with hole for one retaining screw (for sizes 8 X 7 and upwards and
for key lengths above the stepped line in Table 4).
-a)
Keys with both ends round with holes for two retaining screws (for sizes 8 X 7 and 10 X 8
and for key lengths below the stepped line in Table 4)
b) Additionally provided with tapped hole for one or two jacking screws for sizes 12 X 8 and
upwards
- a) Keys with both ends square with holes for two retaining screws (for sizes 8 X 7 and 10 X 8
and for key lengths below the stepped line in Table 4).
b) Additionally provided with tapped hole for one or two jacking screws for sizes 12 X 8 and
upwards.
- Keys with both ends square with chamfer and hole for one retaining screw.
- Keys with%oth ends square with chamfer and holes for two retaining screws.
- Keys with both ends square with chamfer and hole for one spring dowel sleeve

Note - Types A, C and E are meant for machine tools application also.
3. Dimensions
3.1 Keys -

Dimensions

3.1.1 Retaining
3.2 Keywuys
3.3 Preferred

for keys are given in Table

screws, jacking
Dimensions

Length

4. Designation -

1 read with Fig. 1.

screws and spring dowel sleeves for keys are given in Table 2.

for keyways are given in Table 3.

and Weight of Keys -

Preferred

length and weight of keys is given in Table 4.

A parallel key of Type A, width 12 mm, height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be designated
Parallel

as:

Key A 12 X 8 X 50

4.1 If keys of Types E and F from 12 X 8 size upwards are required to be supplied without holes for jacking
screws (OS), this shall be stated when ordering. In this case the designation for a key of Type E, width 12 mm,
height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be as follows:
Parallel

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Key EoS 12 X 8 X 50

151

1s :2048 - 1983

h
TYPE

SECTION

XX

TYPE

SECTION

TYPE

SECTION

XX

. SECTION

YY

YY

t-

TYPE

SECTION

22

SECTION

22

(b)

(a)
TYPE

[yY$=Yq
(a)

TYPE

[ii?

TYPE

(b)

s50
TYPE

r
!T!
3

t--

SECTION

VV

TYPE J
Note - Types A, C and E are meant for machine tools application also.
FIG. I DIMENSIONS AND TYPES OF KEYS (see Table I)

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2048 - 1983
TABLE

1 DIMENSIONS
FOR KEYS
( Clause 3. I and Fig. I )

All dimensions

lbIToFblh
Tol on h

in millimetres.

Min
0

-- 0.025
0

0.030

0.090

0
0.110

0
0.160

ON INDUSTRIAL

Min

Max

Min

MU

0.16

0.25

20

0.16

0.25

36

0.16

0.25

45

IO

45

0.25

0.40

10

56

12

56

0.25

0.40

14

70

I6

70

0.25

0.40

18

90

20

90

0.40

0.60

22

I10

25

I10

0.40

0.60

28

140

32

140
160

3.5

0.40

0.60

36

160

40

0.40

0.60

45

I80

45

I80

4.5

0.40

0.60

50

200

50

200

0.60

0.80

56

220

56

220

5:5

0.60

0.80

63

250

63

250

5.5

0.60

0.80

70

280

70

250

0.60

0.80

320

80

250

0.60

0.80

90

360

90

250

1.00

1.20

100

400

100

250

1.00

1.20

I10

400

110

80

250

1.60

2.00

200

16

2.50

3.00

220

400

18

2.50

3.00

250

400

20

2.50

3.00

280

400

14

Note - Keys with b = 4 to 40 are meant for machine


*To1 on h : Square Section h9; Rectangular
Section hl 1.

HANDBOOK

MUX

Range of Key
Length
(for Machine)
Tools Only)

6.5

0
0.130

Range of Key Length


I

FASTENERS-PART

tools application

400

also.

153

IS :2048 - 1983
TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR RETAINING
SCREWS, JACKING
DOWEL SLEEVES FOR KEYS
( Cloftse 3.1.1 )
All dimensions

SCREWS

HOLE FOR JACKING

50 X 28

! 14

1 20

( Ml2

1 16

--

+d,

HOLE FOR SPRING


DOWEL SLEEVE

SCREW

SPRING

in millimetres.

--b,/)HOLE FOR RETAINING SCREW

AND

8.3 1 16

Ml2

! 17

MI2

I7

Ml2

17

Ml6

21

Ml6

21
20

28

30

M20 X 50

25 x 40

20

28

30

M20 X 55

25 x 50

I
I

Note - Retaining screw and jacking screws are meant for machine tools applications also.
*Dimensions for countersinks and counterbores:
Part 1 Countersinks first revision).
tRetaming
screw: chees; head screw conforming to IS : 1366-1982 Specification for slotted cheese head screws (second revision) or
hexagon socket head cap screw conforming to IS : 2269-1981 Specification for hexagon socket head cap screws (second revision).
fDowel sleeve conforming to IS : 5988-1970 Specification for spring dowel sleeves (light and heavy patterns) for use in foundries.

154

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

1S : 204S -1983

TABLE

DIMENSION
( cl..,.

$ FOR
32 )

KEYWAYS

All dtmenstons in mdlimetres

t-=

/
m

DETAIL

Ring. of
Shafl Dia
d

Kq

Keywy

Kqway

bXh

=--r== II

R.nmng

2X2

10

3x3

31

10

12

4x 4

17

5x5

17

22

6x6

22

30

8X7

30

38

10X8

10

38

44

12X8

12

44

50

[4X9

14

50

58

16 X 10

16

58

65

18X11

18

65

75

20X

12

20

75

85

22X

14

22

85

95

25 x

14

25

+ 0,020
+ O 078
+ 0.030

Sh;z

).C06
3,031

[.0

1.2
~

+ 0.098
+ 0.040

0
0036

+ 0.043
0

+0.120
+ 0.050

0
-0.043

3.0[2
).042

+ 0.0150
0.0150

0
0.030

+ O.O36
0

1.8

+0.1
0

+ 0,0180
0,0180

0.015
0,051

+ 0.021 5
0,0215

0.018
<1.06I

:&

0
0.052

0
0.062

-0,022

0.0260

0.074

O.O26
11,088

+ 00310
0.0310

o
0.074

+ 0,0370
0.0370

,440

[5S0

380

80X40

90

x 45

I04X50

90

160

:08

::::

o
0.087

+ 0.0435
0.0435

0.037
0.124

0.16

0.25

3.8

0,22

44

1.1

+0.1

1.3

0.16

0,25

5.4

1.7

3.3

0.25

040

61

2. I

0.25

0.40

2.1

0.25

0.40

6.5

2.6

0,25

0.40

7.5

3.3
3.8
4,3

+ 0.2

+ 0.2

+
~

9,0

2.6
+ 0.2
0

T0,2

;:

;:

5.4

0,40

0.60

(0

41

5.4

0.40

0.60

!0

4 I

6.4

0.40

0.60

II

5.1

7.4

0.40

0.60

13

0.70

I,Oil

13.7

6.5

94

0.70

Loo

14

82

15,0

10.4

0.70

1.00

0.70

I 00

1.20

1.643

8.4

I 1.4

12.4

22.0

[44

(5,4

d~j
;

+03

mo

20.0

31.0

195

I 20

1,60

t 20

1.60

200

2.s0

20

25(3

200

2. so

!
f
~

+0.1
0

1.7

130

120

:7

80
/

0.!6

0.08

0.16

0.16

0.08

3.3

5.5

0.032
0.106

o.06-

2.8

4.0

0.0260

+0.1
0

3,5

330

To!
on
f,

+0,3

380

r:

0.16

J--_lq

ToI
0.

23

6.0

+0.180
+ 0080

!,

Max

30

+0,149
+ 0.065

[,4
1.8

5.0

+ 0.052
0

Tools

,,9

2.5
+ 0.030
0

bfin

1,

1,

+ 0.0643

for Wacbie
Applicw,on

Tol
on

1,

1,

fit
Hub
DIO

+ 0.025

To1
ml

lb

ToI o b

Shaft
H9

12

AT A

IS :2048-1983
TABLE

LENOTH

PREFERRED

AND

WEIGHT

OF KEYS

( C6W.X 3,3 )

Preferred
Length

Key (b X h), mm

(0 mm
3x3

2X2

4X5

5x5

8X7

6x6

[OX8

12X8

14X9

16X

10

18X11

20 x1222x14

*Weight
t

0.188

0.423

0.251

0.565

10

0.314

12

0.377

14

0440

16

0,502

a707

1.26

1.95

0,848

I 51

2.35

0.989

1.76

2.75

3.94

t.13

2.01

3.14

4.52

1.27

2.26

3.53

5,09

7,93

2.5(

3.92

5.65

8.80

22

1.55

2.76

4,32

6.22

25

1.77

3.14

4.91

1.07

9.67

13.8

{!.0

3,52

5.50

7.9[

12.3

17.6

21.1

4.02

6.28

9.04

14,1

20. !

24, I

254

4.52

63;

7.06

10.2

,.

f..=

1,.,

5.65

8.83

. ...!...

9.81
11.0

15.8

!,,

226

27. i

3S.6

25. I

30 I

39.6

lY.8

28.3

33.9

445

56.5

!..

-- {
IL.

220

31.4

37.7

49.5

628

77.7

24.6

35.2

42.2

55,4

70.3

87.0

10b

!7.8

27.7

39.6

47.5

62.3

79. I

97.9

I 19

152

19.8

30.8

44.0

52.8

-~

8E.O

lo9

132

169

192

50.2

124

151

193

220

35.2

90

!:

39.6

,,V,
,W

II

i:

no

160

~~,)

..

79.1

60.3

56.5

67.8

89.o

7<.

ox 0

829
94.2

100

63 X 31

70 x 36

80X40

90 x 45

too x so

10b

140

170

2[8

247

3{7

407

---

1<$

I 88

242

275

352

452

565

109

138

[71

,.,
.. .

9..
...

.,?
. .

.
387

497

622

124

157

[94

235

302

343

4..,

4.

./..

138

176

218

.27s
..

.7ss
..

f97
.-

158

201

249

387

440

563

113

226

! 7A

I
;,

,1

32

281

.-.

----

180
200

.,,

..

69.1

15.8

80

I40

56

14.1

50 x 28

L,..

70

125

25

1.98

15.7

226

50

45

32

56

43X22

!
I

28

36x20

1,41

32x[8

0.565

45

28 x 16

0.628

14

18

36

lot

20

..
.:,

25

for KcYs~TYw B. kgl 1 OQO PICCCS(ApprOx)

PM
..

,
I
I
!1

301

,.

6T3
---

,
1

723

/..

..<

791

!
760
,

,.,

I
I

967

904

.. .

1110

I
.
1

. .. .

lrul

I 240
1410

I
,

I 54J
I 764

2080
2750

2s0

339

435

495

633

8!4

1020

1240

I 590

1980

2340

3[1

,377

484

550

703

Q04

! [30

I 380

I 770

~ ~~

*W

3 06Q

414

53>

504

-74

995

I 240

\ j~o

I 940

2 420

2 860

3 570

4 !Xq

644

687

880

1130

i411J

1 730

2210

2750

3250

3830

4 ;50

b 280

7 SW

985

I 270

1580

I 930

2470

3080

3fYo2

4 29U

5320

7030

8820

1440

I 810

2210

2820

3510

4 170

4903

60911

7930

10100

12600

1 630

2040

2480

3 180

3950

4690

5 <10

6850

9030

I I 350

14200

~ ~m

2760

3530

4400

5200

6 r20

7 61X3

10040

12 ioo

15700

593

85.3

250
280

769

1 130

320
360

400

38043
I

5 5?0

Ilwm

Wmght
deducrmn
. . T.,- r.,

.,

,,,!.

Now
For

0015
I

0.045

0.108

For rnach~.e tools applcwon

calcuiaw.s

of wetgh!$, d.nsIIY

0.211
!

0.364

0,755
!

1,35
I

2.97

1.94
!

(W keys (h X h), 4 X 4 m 40 X 22 pref.erred length (/) ranges (mm

of wed taken as 785 K/cmi.

6.WI

431
1

10 m 250.

8.09
1

11.4
IL

21.1

147
I

31.1
,

43,7
,

118

!69

214
I

433

298
I

615

844

IS : 2048 - 1983
5. Tolerances

on Length of Keys and Keyways


Length of Key

Tolerance on

mm

Key Length

Keyway Length

mm

mm

up to 28

0.2

+ 0.2

32 to 80

-- 0.3

+ 0.3

90 and above

+ 0.5

0.5

1
6. Error of Symmetry

and Parallelism

d
N9

1 Diameter of

Above

Shaft
up to

b
I

10

,
1 12
/

12

17

22

30

38

44

50

58

65

75

85

95

17

22

30

38

44

50

58

65

75

85

95

110

10

j 12

14

16

18

20

22

7. Material of Key -

130

130

150

0.1

I10

Steel of tensile strength

0.16

I
1

0.2

, 25

28

0.3

not less than 600 MPa shall be used as material

32 ,
/

36

0.4

for key.

8. Packing
8.1 Packages

shall be made in such a way that keys are protected

against

mechanical

damage

in transit.

9. Marking
9.1 Such marks as may be specified by the purchaser shall be marked on the top or bottom surface of the parallel
keys or in the packaging containing keys.
9.2 ISI Certification Marking -

Details available

EXPLANATORY

with the Indian

Standards

Institution.

NOTE

Parallel keys and keyways were formerly covered in IS : 2048-1975 Specification for parallel keys and
keyways Cfirst revision). However, parallel keys and keyways meant for machine tools Gere covered in IS : 27 IO1975 Specification for parallel keys and keyways for machine tools (first revision).
The dimensions and tolerances of keys of sizes 4 X 4 to 40 X 22 covered in IS : 2048- 1975 were exactly the
same as those covered in IS : 2710-1973, which specification was applicable to machine tools. Only the range of
.key lengths and dimensions of keyways differed for machine tool applications.
In the present revision of IS : 2048, the requirements of keys for machine tools including the range of key
lengths and details of keyway have been incorporated.
In addition, the original range of sizes 2 X 2 to 100 X 50 as
also the Types A to J have been retained.
This version
HANDBOOK

of the standard

ON INDUSTRIAL

(IS : 2048-1983) shall supersede

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2710-1975 after its publication.


159

IS :2291- 1981
Indian

Standard

SPECIl?ICATION
FOR
TANGENTIAL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( Second

I Scope nd hub.

Specifies dimensions

.l It also gives relation

and tolerances

Revision )

for tangential

which should be observed

keys and their corresponding

between diameter

of shaft and section

keyways in shaft
of key.

, Dimensions

Note - The length I is a function of the design in question; its value must always be indicated.
:hosen so as to be 10 to 15 percent greater than the length of the hub.

160

HANDBOOK

It is recommended

ON INDUSTRIAL

that this length be

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2291- 1981
All dimensions
Shaft
Dia-

meter

d+

-r
+

Key

-I--

Thickness
t

iomi
nal

Tolerance
h,l

Calculated
width

in millimetres.

Chamfer
S

Min

Keyway

In the hub
r!

Max

Nominal

oleonce

Drepth
In the shaft

Calculated
width

Radius
R

nal

Tole*ante

In the
hub

In the
shaft
bz$

Max

Min

19.3
19.8
20.1
21.0
22.5

19.6
20.2
20.5
21.4
22.8

0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6

0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4

23.2
24.0
24.8
25.6
27.8

23.5
24.4
25.2
26.0
28.2

0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6

0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4

ht

b**

60
63
65
70
71

7
7
7
7
8

19.3
19.8
20.1
21.0
22.5

0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6

0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8

7
7
7
7
8

7.3
7.3
7.3
7.3
8.3

75
80
85
90
95

8
8
8
8
9

23.2
24.0
24.8
25.6
27.8

0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6
0.6

0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8
0.8

8
8
8
8
9

8.3
8.3
8.3
x.3
9.3

100
110
120
125
130

9
9
10
10
10

28.6
30.1
33.2
33.9
34.6

0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0

0.8
0.8
1.2
1.2
1.2

9
9
10
10
10

9.3
9.3
10.3
10.3
10.3

28.6
30.1
33.2
33.9
34.6

29.0
30.6
33.6
34.4
35. 1

0.6
0.6
1.0
1.0
1.0

0.4
0.4
0.7
0.7
0.7

140
150
160
170
180

II
II
12
12
12

37.7
39. I
42.1
43.5
44.9

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2
1.2

II
--I&
I2
12

11.4
11.4
-Gr
12.4
12.4

37.7
39.1
42. I
43.5
44.9

38.3
39.7
42.8
44.2
45.9

1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0

0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7
0.7

190
200
220
240
250
260

I4
14
16
I6
18
18

49.6
51.0
57.1
59.9
64.6
66.0

1.0
1.0
1.6
I.6
1.6
1.6

1.2
1.2
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

14
14
16
16
I8
18

14.4
14.4
16.4
16.4
18.4
18.4

49.6
51.0
57.1
59.9
64.6
66.0

50.3
51.7
57.8
60.6
65.3
66.7

1.0
I.0
I.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

0.7
0.7
I.2
1.2
1.2
1.2

280
3QO
320
340
360

20
20
22
22
26

72. I
74.8
81.0
83.6
93.2

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0

20
20
22
22
26

20.4
20.4
22.4
22.4
26.4

72.1
74.8
81.0
83.6
93.2

72.8
75.5
81.6
84.3
93.8

2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0
2.0

95.9
98.6
108.2
110.9
112.3
113.5
123.1
125.9
136.7
140.8
153.1
157.1

2.5
2.5
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0

3.0
,3.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0
4.0

26
26
30
30
30
30
34
34
38
38
42
42

95.9
98.6
108.2
110.9
112.3
113.6
123.1
125.9
136.7

96.6
99.3
108.8
111.6
112.9
114.3
123.8
126.6
137.4
141.5
153.8
157.8

2.5
2.5
%O
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0
3.0

2.0
2.0
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5

0
- 0.090

0.2

t 0.2
0

380
400
420
440
450
460
480
500

- 0.110

0
- 0.13c

26
26
30
30
30
30
34
34
38
38
42
42

0
- 0.16(

0
0.3

26.4
26.4
30.4
30.4
30.4
30.4
34.4
34.4
38.4
38.4
42.4
42.4

+ 0.3
0

1
j
j
j

17.1

*For intermediate shaft diameters, the dimensions of keys and keyways given for the diameter immediately above should be adopted.
For shaft diameters greater than 630 mm, the dimensions of the keys and the keyways should be determined as follows:
t = 0.068 d
t, = I
12 = t + 0.4 mm (for t 45 mm)
= t + 0.5 mm (for t 45 mm)
h=tX(d-t)
h,=b=tX(d-t)
hz = ts X (d - tz)
s and R according to the table of the note below.
**The width b is a function of the widths bl and b2 of the milled keyways, respectively in the hub and in the shaft. Its theoretical value is
equal to t X (d - t).
tThe width
calculated value is
$The width
calculated value is

HAYDBOOK

bl is a function of the milled depth t,. Its value has been calculated on the basis of the formula bl = b =r X (d - 0. This
both the nominal and maximum value of the width of the keyway in the hub.
bl is a function of the milled depth t2. Its value has been calculated on the basis of the formula b = 12 X (d - 12). This
both the nominal and minimum value of the width of the keyway in the shaft.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

161

IS : 2291 - 1981
Note - When the drive is subject to particularly severe shocks or when changes in the direction of rotation are relatively frequent it is
recommended
to use a key of larger than specified section whose dimensions will be calculated from the following data:
t =o.i d
11 = 1
12 = f -I- 0.3 mm (for t 10 mm)
= I + 0.4 mm (for 10 mm r 45 mm)
=r + 0.5 mm (for t 45 mm)
b=rX(d--)=0,3d
b, = b = I X (d - r) = 0.3 d
bz = rz X (d - r2) s and R according ro rhe ruble beloi:
All dimensions
For r
Above

---

9
14
I8
26
42
56
63

9
14
18
26
42
56

up to

in millimetres.

Min
0.6
1.0
1.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0

1
I

Max

Max

0.8
1.2
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
6.0

0.6
1.0
1.6
2.5
3.0
4.0
5.0

1
Min

0.4
0.7
1.2
2.0
2.5
3.0
4.0

- A pair of tangential key shall be designated by their common thickness, combined width and
common length followed by the number of this standard.

3. Designation

Example:
A pair of tangential keys with thickness t = 8 mm, width b = 24 mm and length I= 100 mm shall be
designated as Tangential Keys 8 X 24 X 100 IS : 2291.

4. General Requirements
4.1 The relative positions of keys after assembly shall be made secure by dowelling

or some other suitable means.

4.2 To facilitate the cutting of keyways on the shaft and in the hub, they may be located 180 apart, by agreement
betyeen the interested parties.

5. Material of Key -

Steel of tensile strength not less than 600 MPa.

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1963 and subsequently revised in 1976. On the basis of comments
received, the committee responsible for its preparation felt it necessary to revise the specification again to be in
line with IS0 3117-1977 Tangential keys and keyways.
In the present revision, sectional view of keyway has been modified and the values of calculated width of
keyway in hub and in shaft has been specified.
162

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART3

IS : 2292

- 1974

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR

TAPERKEYSANDKEYWAYS
(First Revision )
Scope -

Dimensions

Types Type
T,ype
Type

The keys shall be of the fol!owing types:


A - Keys with both ends round
B - Keys with both ends square
C - Keys with one end round and the other end square.

and tolerances

for plain taper keys and keyways.

Dimensions
1

Kejs

SECTIONXX

TYPE

TYPE
All dimensions

Tole on b

2
3
4
5

0
- 0.025

25

3
4

0
- 0.030

0
- 0.025
0
- 0.030

22

0
- 0.052

14
14

0
-0.110

in millimetres.

Tol on h*

h9

TYPE

Min

Max

0.16

0.25

Min

Max

20

0.16

0.25

36

0.16

0.25

10

45

0.25

0.40

12

56

0.25

0.40

16

70

0.60

0.80

63

250

0.60

0.80

70

280

28

16

0.60

0.80

80

320

32

18

0.60

0.80

90

360

1.00

1.20

100

400

36
*Tolerance

-j.O62
on h: Square

20

Section h9; Rectangular

- it,30

.!

Range of key length, I

Section hl I.
(Continued.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

163

IS : 2292- 1974
b

Tqle on b

h9

40

/I

22

45

--- 0.062

25

Tol on h*

Range of key length, I

s
Min

Max

Min

MaTi

1.09

1.20

I IO

400

- 0.130

I .oo

1.20

125

400

140

400

1.00
_(

1.20

1.60

1.60

100
*Tolerance

0.087

on h: Square

h9: Rectangular

1.60

0.160

2.50

3.00

2.50

3.00

2.50

3.00

50
Section

Section

2.00

2.00

/
I

2.00

I
1

hl I.

3.2 Keyways
TAPER

x-7

Cl00

DETAIL OF
KEYWAY AND KEY
d

IT---I
)

SECTION

XX

All dimensions

ksmw
X-4
in millimf :tres.
Keyway
To1 on
t2

200

45X25

200

230

50 X 28

+ 0.080

230

260

56X32

260

290

63 X 32

1
1

56

20.0

63

20.0

290

330

70 X 36

70

330

380

80 X 40

80

380

440

90x

440

500

164

45

100 x 50

15.0

1 90
1 100

9.1

17.0

5.0

+ 0.220
+ 0.100
I

0.25
0.25

0.16

0.25

0.25

0.40

0.25

0.40

I 0.70

1.00

;==I
T-1
II.1

+ 0.3
0

22.0

13.1

1.20

1.60

25.0

14.1

2.00

2.50

2.00

2.50

18.1

2.00

2.50

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

28.0

+ 0.120
0.260

+ 0.3
0

0.16
0.16

31.0

16.1

1
HANDBOOK

3.3 Preferred

Length and Weight of Keys

All dimensions

Preferred
Length
I

in millimetres.
Key (b X It)

2X2

3X3

4X4

5X5

6X6

8X7

10X8

12X8

14X9

16X1018X112OX1222X1425X1428X1632X1836X204OX2245X255OX28

Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ 1 000 pieces (approximate)*


6

0.186

S--

0.246

0.558

10

0.306

0.695

1.24

12

0.366

0.83

14

0.424

16

I .48

2.32

_.

_.

._

0.966

1.73

2.71

0.482

1.10

I .97

3.09

4.46

18

0.540

1.23

2.21

3.47

5.01

20

0.598

22
25

28

1.37

2.45

. 3.84

I .50

2.69

4.22

6.1

1.69

3.04

4.78

6.92

10.8

15.5

1.87

3.39

5.34

7.73

12.1

17.3

5.90

8.66

9.52

2.14

3.86

6.08

8.80

13.7

19.7

23.6

36

2.39

4.32

6.81

9.86

15.4

22.1

26.5

40

4.77

7.54

10.9

17.1

24.5

29.4

38.7

45

5.34

8.45

12.2

19.1

27.5

33.0

43.4

55.2

9.32

13.5

10.4

5.1

63

70

21.2

30.4

36.5

48.

61.2

75.9

23.6

33.9

40.7

53.6

68.4

84.8

103

-~

16.8

26.4

38.0

45.6

60.0

76.5

95.1

116

149

50

._

32

56

_~

18.6

29.2

42.0

50.4

66.5

84.8

105

128

165

187

80

33.2

47.1

51.3

15.6

96.5

120

146

188

214

274

90

37.0

53.3

64.0

84.6

108

134

163

211

239

308

397

--

100

58.8

70.4

93.5

119

148

181

233

265

341

439

551

110

64.3

77.2

102

131

163

198

256

290

374

482

605

741

125

86.9

115

147

183

223

289

328

423

546

685

839

I 080

~~

140

96.3

125

163

204

248

322

366

471

609

764

937

I 200

I 500

All dimensions

Preferred
Length
I

in millimetres.
Key (b X h)

2X2

3X3

4X4

5X5

6X6

8X7

10X8

12X8

14X9

16X1018X1120X1222X1425X1428X1632X1836X2040X2245X2550X23

Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ 1 000 pieces (approximate)*


160

144

185

231

281

365

415

535

691

206

257

314

407

463

597

283

346

449

510

659

490

557

550

626

180
200
220

376

250
280

692

320

868

1 060

1 370

773

973

1 190

1 530

1 910

854

1 070

1 320

I 700

2 220

721

933

1 170

1 440

I 860

2 320

811

1 050

1 320

1630

2100

2 620

899

1 170

1 470

1810

2 330

2 926

1010

1 320

1 660

2 050

2 650

3 300

1 470

1 850

2 290

2 950

3 700

2040

2510

3250

4080

360
400
Weight deduction

~
0.013

0.043

0.104

0.203

0.35 1

0.724

1.29

1.84

for Type A
Note ~ For taper keys of width h = 56 to 100 mm, there are no specified lengths.
*For calculations of weights, density of steel taken as 7.85 g/cm).

2.81

4.06

5.66

7.62

10.7

13.8

19.8

29.2

40.6

55.8

80.6

1710

112

IS : 2292 - 1974
1. Designation
lesignated

A taper

key of Type A having

width

12 mm, height 8 mm and length

50 mm shall be

as:
Taper Key A 12 X & X50 IS : 2292

5. Tolerances

on Length of Key and Keyway

Length

Tolerance

of Key

Key Length

Up to 28
32 to 80
90 and above

6. Material of Key -

Steel of tensile strength

On
Keyway Length
+ 0.2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5

0.2
0.3
0.5

not less than 600 MN/m2 (- 60 kgf/mml).

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1963 and was based on DIN 6886-1956 which has since been revised.
While issuing this revision, the committee responsible for the preparation
of this standard has brought this
standard in line with ISO/ R 774-1969 Taper keys with or without Gib-head and their corresponding
keyways.
In addition, the weight of keys for specified lengths, derived from DIN 6886-1967, has been included in the
standard.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

167

IS :2293 - 1974

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATfON
FOi3
GIB-HEAD KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( First
I. Scope -

Dimensions

and tolerances

Revision-)

for Gib-head

keys and keyways.

!: Dimensions
!.l Keys

All dimensions

in millimetres.

80
90
100

00.087

*To1 on h: Square

168

70

80

45

2.50

3.00

50

2.50

3.00

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

h9; Rectangular

Section hl 1.

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2293- 1974
2.2 Keyways

x---l

SECTION

XX

All dimensions in millimetres.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

TAPER1:lOO

2.3 Pwferred

Length

and

Weight

of Keys
All dimensions

in millimetres

Key (b X h)

Preferred
Length

4X4

5X5

6X6

8X7

IO X 8

12 X 8

14 X 9

16 X lo

18 X II

20 X 12

22 X I4

25 X I4

28 X I6

32 X I8

36 X 20

40 X 22

45 X 25

50 X 28

*Weight for Keys, Type B, kg/ I 000 pieces (approximate)


I4

1 2.57

4.23

I6

2.82

4.62

7.15

I8

3.07

5.00

7.70

20

3.31

5.39

8.25

14.4

3.55

5.77

8.81

15.9

22

25

3.92

6.35

9.64

16.3

24.5

4.28

6.92

IO.5

17.7

26.4

32

4.75

7.67

Il.5

19.4

28.7

37.4

28

36

..~

5.25

8.42

12.6

21.1

31.2

40.0

40

5.70

9.16

13.7

22.8

33.8

43.3

45

6.27

IO.1

15.0

24.9

36.8

47.1

65.2

86.3

II.0

16.4

27. I

39.9

50.6

69.8

92.6

I21

12.0

18.0

29.5

43.4

54.8

75.4

100

130

166

63

19.7

32.5

47.7

60.6

82.3

109

I41

178

231

70

21.5

35.4

51.7

6p.7

88.7

II7

ISI

I91

249

294

39.4

57.6

71.7

98.2

129

166

209

271

320

426

43.4

63.4

78.6

107

I41

I81

227

294

347

460

621

50
56

80

901~

60.3

_~

100

68.2

86.0

I I6

I51

I95

245

317

372

493

665

874

I IO

74.8

93.3

I25

!64

210

262

339

398

527

707

929

I 190

102

138

181

230

278

373

436

574

772

1 010

I 290

112

I51

l9R

251

303

407

475

626

828

I 090

I 390

I 840

2 370

I65

220

279

335

451

534

690

920

I 200

I 520

2 010

2 580

241

306

366

493

572

753

I 000

I 300

I 650

2 170

2 780

397

536

620

818

I 080

I 410

I 780

2 340

3 000

577

668

881

I 170

I 510

I910

2 480

3 210

639

739

971

I 290

I 660

2 100

2 750

3 520

808

I 060

I 400

I 810

2 280

2 980

3 800

I 170

I 550

2 000

2 490

3 270

4 170

I 700

2 200

2 750

3 610

4 490

2 390

3 000

3 920

4 990

I25
14n
160

180
200

nn
250

280

320

,-

wn

400

Nnt~

332
_

428

-.
-

The leneths of kevs of width h = 56 to 100 mm shall be as agreed to between the purchaser

and the supplier.

IS : 2293 - 1974
3. Designation

A Gib-head

key of width 12 mm, height 8 mm and length 50 mm shall be designated


Gib-Head

4. Tolerance

Key 12 X 8 X 50 IS : 2293

on Length of Keys
Tolerance
mm

Length of Key
mm

5.

as:

Material of Key -

up to 28

0.2

32 to 80

0.3

90 and above

0.5

Steel of tensile strength

not less than 600 MN/mm2

(- 60 kgf/mm2).

.!

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1963 and was based on DIN 6887-1956 which has since been revised.
While issuing this revision, the committee responsible for the preparation
of this standard has brought this
standard essenfially in line with ISO/ R 774-1969 Taper keys with or without Gib-head and theircorresponding
keyways. In addition, the weights of keys for specified lengths, derived from DIN 6887-1968, have been included
in the standard.
HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

171

IS :2294 - 1980

Indian Standard
SPECIFICATION
FOR
WOODRUFF
KEYS AND KEYWAYS
( First Revision.)
~__

. Scope -

Specifies the dimensions

and general

reqmrements

of woodruff

.l It also gives the relationship to be observed between the diameter


0th torque transmission
and positional applications.
. Dimensions
.l Keys -

keys and keyways.

of the shaft and the section of the key for

and Tolerances

See Table

I.
I
TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

All dimensions

OF KEYS

in millimetres.
EDGES

SHARP

REMOVED

-_cr-

I
b

Tol on b

.
Tol on h,
hll

hl

h9*

sxL5O

-b-cl
To1 on D
h12

s
Min

1.4

I.0

4.0
-

2.6

1.5
2.0

0
0.025

2.0
2.5

7.0

0
0.060

7.0

2.6

10.0

3.7
3.7

0
- 0.075

3.0

0
0.120

0
o.,lso

10.0

Max

0.16

0.25

0.16

0.25

0.16

0.25

0.16

0.25

0.16

0.25
i

3.0

:.

5.0
4.0

_;,030

o<

_:,090

13.0

- 0.110

:~

5.0
6.0
6.0
8.0
10.0

0.036

*A closer tolerance

172

0.40

8
-

may be adopted

32.0

subject to agreement

- 00.250

0.40

0.60
0.60

between the supplier and the purchaser.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-FART

IS :2294 - 1980
2.2

Keyways

--

See

Table 2.

TABLE 2

DIMENSIONS

AND TOLERANCES

All dimensions

OF KEYWAYS

in millimetres.

SECTION

AA

DETAIL

Width

Key
b
bXh,XD

tm--v
Normal

Nom

Depth

Tolerance

Shaft
N9

on h

-rol on

Fit

Close Fit

Hub
Js9

Shaft and Hub


P9

fl

II

To1 on
12

11

Max

Min

1.; x

1.4 x

4.0

1.0

1.0

0.6

0.16

0.08

1.5 X

2.6 X

7.0

1.5

2.0

0.8

,O.16

0.08

2.0 X

2.6 X

7.0

2.0

1.8

1.0

0.16

0.08

2.0 x

3.7 x 10.0

2.0

2.9

1.0

0.16

0.08

2.5 x

3.7 x 10.0

2.5

2.7

1.2

0.16

0.08

3.0 x

5.0 x 13.0

3.0

3.8

1.4

0.16

o.ori

3.0 X

6.5 X 16.0

3.0

5.3

1.4

0.16

0.08

4.0 X

6.5 X 16.0

4.0

5.0

1.8

0.25

0.16

4.0 x

7.5 x 19.0

4.0

6.0

1.8

0.25

0.16

5.0 X

6.5 X 16.0

5.0

4.5

2.3

0.25

0.16

5.0 x

7.5 x 19.0

5.0

5.5

2.3

0.25

d.16

7.0

2.3

0.25

0.16

6.0

6.5

2.8

0.25

0.16

6.0

7.5

2.8

0.25

0.16

0.40

0.25

0.40

0.25

0.004
0.029

t.030

+ 0.012
- 0.012

+ El:

_ 5.0 x
6.0 X

9.0 x 22.0
9.0 X 22.0

6.0 X 10.0 X 25.0


8.0 X 11.0 X 28.0

Note -

The diameter

8.0

i.036

- 0.015
2 0.051

%:~

of the keyways

in the shaft shall be equal to nominal


-

ON INDUSTRIAL

8.0

+ 0.2
0

+0.3
0

FASTENERS-PART

3.3
3.3

10.0

10.0

6.

HANDBOOK

0.012
0.042

5.0

10.0 X 13.0 X 32.0

0.006
0.031

+ 0.1
0

diameter

+ 0.1
0

.
+ 0.2
0

D of the key with a tolerance

of + 0.5 mm
--

IS :2294 - 1980
3. Material -

Steel of tensile strength

not less than 590 MPa in the finished

condition.

4. Relationship of Shaft Diameter to Key Size -Two


series of relationships between shaft diameter and key size
are given in Table 3 - Series 1 for torque applications and Series 2 for positional applications
(for example,
where, as in the case of an interference fit, the torque is not transmitted
through the key but through the
shaft/ hub interface).
TABLE 3

RELATIONSHIP

OF SHAFT DIAMETER

TO KEY SIZE

All dimensions in millimetres.

5. Designation

Shall be designated

by its width and its height followed by the number

of this standard,

Example:
A woodruff

key of width 4 mm and height 6.5 mm shall be designated


Woodruff

Key 4 X 6.5 -

EXPLANATORY

as:

IS : 2294

NOTE

This standard was first published in 1963. In view of the developments at the international
level the
committee responsible for the preparation of this standard decided to revise it to bring it in line with IS0 : 39121977 Woodruff keys and keyways. Whitney keys and keyways have not been included in this revision and this
form shall be adopted by agreement between the supplier and the purchaser. Relationship of the shaft diameter
to key size have been included in this revision.

IS : 2638 - 1974
Indian

Standard

SPECIFICATION FOR
FLAT SPLIT COTTERS
( First Revision )

1. Scope -

Covers the requirements

for flat split totters.

1. Grade - Precision Grade (P) and Black Grade (B) as specified in IS : 1367 - 1967 Technical supply conditions
or threaded fasteners (jirsr revision).
3. Dimensions
5.1 As given in Table
5.2 Thickness -

1 and Table 2.

As given in Table 2.

3.3 Legs - The legs shall be unequal


shall be as given in Table 1.
3.4 Split Length -

in length, the length of the longer leg and the difference in length of the legs

The length of split shall be equal to half the length of the flat split cotter.

3.5 Preferred

length width combinations

1. Tolerances

shall be as given in Table

1.

As given in Fig. 1.

&

I+-$

1 B PRECISION GRADE

1A BLACK GRADE
FIG.

5. Mechanical

TOLERANCES

ON FLAT

SPLIT

COTTERS

Properties

5.1 Precision Grade 5.2 Black Grade -

Property

Property

class 6.6 of IS : 1367 - 1967.

class 4.6 of IS : 1367-1967.

6. General Requirements
6.1 Finish - Flat split totters shall be cleanly finished, flat and true with clean cut edges and free from burrs and
other defects.
6.2 Preservation - Unless otherwise specified, flat split totters shall be supplied in a well cleaned condition
xtitably protected against rust.
6.3 In regard to requirements not covered in this standard, it shall conform to the requirements
General requirements
for the supply of metallurgical
materials (&St revision).
7. Sampling -The sampling and criteria of acceptance
sampling non-threaded
fasteners.
8. Designation

Shall be designated

shall be in accordance

and

of IS : 1387-1967

with IS : 682 l-l 973 Methods for

by the name, thickness, width, length, number of this standard,

and grade.

Example:
A flat split cotter of thickness
designated as:

4 mm, width

12 mm, length 50 mm and of black grade shall be

Flat split cotter 4 X 12 X 50 IS : 2638-B

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

175

IS : 2638 - 1974
9. Test
9.1 Bend Test - Each sample selected as specified in 7 shall, when cold, permit
the length of the split and the wings thus opened shall be capable of being bent
sign of failure through an angle of 180 until the ends of split portion touch
internal radii of the bends are not more than half the thickness of the material.
arris formed on one leg by the punching operations shall not be considered

TABLE

being opened up for two-thirds of


backwards without showing any
the body of the cotter, and the
Cracks appearing in the burr or
as a defect.

DIMENSIbNS
FOR FLAT SPLIT COTTERS
( Clauses 3.1, 3.3 and 3.5 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

t
T 11

WIDTH

D BASIC

BLACK

D h15

PRECISION

Dh13

MAX

6.00

MIN

7.42

MAX
MIN

3
1

10

12

14

16

18

20

22

25

28

l0.W

12.00

14.00

16.00

16.00

20.00

22.00

25.00

26.00

32

36

32.00

36.00

40

50

LO.00 50.0(

11.30 13.30 15.30 17.30 19.16 21.16 24.16 27.16 31.00 35.00 39.00,49.0(

9.42

8.00

10.00 12.00 14.00 16.00 19.W 20.00 22.00 25.00 26.W 32.00 36.00 40.00 S&0(

7.76

9.79 11.73 13.73 15.73 17.73 19.67 21.67 24.67 27.67

31.61 35.61 39.61 49.61

Ii COMBINATIONS

1 46.2

1 43.6

1 45.5

71.5 1 66.5 1 70.6 1 69.41


76.5 I 73.5 I 75.6 I 74.41

70
75 1

I132

I 126

I 131

1 129 I

172

168

171

169

170

162
192

176
166

181
191

179
169

160
190

*For dimensions

176

1 44.51

I
I

130 I

of T, see Table 2.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :2638

- 1974

10. Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the number of totters packed in each carton shall be 100,250,500 and
1 000 or in bags of 50 kg. Each carton/bag
shall have flat split cotter of one size and of one grade only.
11. Marking
11.1 The cartons or bags shall be suitably marked to indicate size, grade quantity
trade-mark.

and manufacturers

11.2 ZSZ Certification Marking -

Institution.

Details available

TABLE 2

with the Indian

THICKNESS OF FLAT SPLIT COTTERS


( Clauses 3.1 and 3.2 )
All dimensions

Basic Size
T
3.2

in millimetres.

Precision h13

Black h15
Min

Max

3.20

3.02

EXPLANATORY

mechanical

Standards

name and

Max

Min

3.20

2.72

NOTE

This standard was originally published in 1964. Subsequent to the revision of IS : 1367, the symbols for
properties4D and 5S are being substituted by 4.6 and 6.6.

In the preparation
of this standard, assistance has been derived from IRSS H7-51 Flat split totters,
issued by the Ministry of Railways, Government
of India.
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

177

IS : 6166- 1971
Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
THIN TAPER KEYS AND KEYWAYS
.. Scope-

Dimensions

and tolerances

for thin taper keys and keyways.

!. Dimensions
!.l Keys

TYPE

TYPE

All dimensions

in millimetres.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6166- 1971
2.2 Keyways

rlAPER WOO

I-

DETAIL A

All dimensions

1 Range of Shaft
-Dia
d
Above

HANDBOOK

Key

in millimetres.

Keyway

bXh

To1 on
II

I2

30

8X

30

38

10X

38

44

12X

+ 0.098

12

1.7

13

+ 0.1
0

To1 on

up to

22

2.2
2.2

+ 0.1
0

Min

t Max

0.16

0.25

0.25

0.40

0.25

0.40

0.25

0.40

44

50

14X

2.2

50

58

16X

2.4

0.25

0.40

58

65

18X

2.4

0.25

0.40

0.40

0.60

0.40
_(
1 0.40

0.60

65

75

20X

2.4

15

85

22x

2.9

85

95

25X

2.9

95

110

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

1 + o.2

! 0.60

179

IS : 6166 - 1971
2.3 Preferred

Length

of Key

Key

Section

10

12

14

16

18

14

16

18

36

40

45

50

_
_
_
_
_
_
-

_
_
_
_
_
_
-

_
_
_
_
_
_
-

_
_
_
_
_
_
~

_
_
_
_
_
_
-.
-

160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400

10

11

12

20

22

25

28

32

_
_
_
_
~-

_
_
_
_
_
.-

20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45

20
22
25
28
32
36
40
45

25
28
32
36
40
45

32
36
40
45

-36
40
45

45

_
-

_
_
_
-

_
_
_.
--

50
56
63
; 70
: ,80
j 90

50
56
63
70
-

50
56
63
70
80
90

50
56
63
70
80
90

50
56
63
70
80
90

50
56
63
70
80
90

50
56
63
70
80
90

56
63
70
80
90

63
70
80
90

~
70
80
90

-80
90

90

too
110
125
-

100
110
125
140
-

100
110
125
,140
160
180
_

100
110
125
140
160
180
200
_

100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
~~

--

100
110
125
140
160
180
200.
220
250
~
-

100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
-~

100
I10
125
140
160
I80
200
220
250
280
320
-

100
110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
-

$ 100
j 110
125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400

3. Designation

designated

-- A thin taper key of Type A having width 10 mm,height

100
110
125
140
160
I80
200
220
250
280
320
360
400

125
140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400

140
160
180
200
220
250
280
320
360
400

6 mm and length 25 mm shall.be

as:
Key A 10 X 6 X 25 IS : 6166

4. Tolerances

on Length of Key and Keyway

Length

of Key

lJpmtZ28
32 to 80
90 and above
5. Material of Key -

180

Tolerance

Tolerance

on Key

:2
- 0.3
- 0.5
Carbon

steel of tensile strength

on Keyway

+m:2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5
not less than 600 MN/ m2 (60 kgf/ mm2 approximately).

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6167 - 1971

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
THIN PARALLEL
KEYS AND KEYWAYS

1. Scope -

Dimensions

and tolerances

for thin parallel

keys and keyways.

2. Dimensions
2.1

Keys

TYPE

TYPE

All dlmenslons

Tol on b

25

0.052

28
32
36

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

0
0.062

Range of Key Length


I

s
I

Min

Max

Min

Max

0.25

0.40

10

56

0.25

0.40

14

70

0.40

0.60

36

160

0.60

0.80

70

280

10

0.60

0.80

80

320

0.60

0.80

90

360

1.00

1.20

100

400

hll
3

0.030

in millimetres.

h9
0

TYPE

Tol on /I

.-0.060

II
12

FASTENERS-PART

0
0.110

181

IS : 6167- 1971

2.2 Keyways

cf+t2
t1

i
~XX

SECTION

All dimensions in millimetres.


,
Range

of

Keyway

Key

Shaft Dia

d
b X h

Above Up to
12

17

5x3

17

22

6X4

22

30

30

38

10 X

8X5
6

10

38

44

12X 6

12

44

50

14 X 6

14

To1 on b

-Runnin
Cm
Shaft

11

Light I
-__
Shaft
DlO

+ 0.030
0

+0.078
+0.030

0
0.030

+ 0.036
0

+ 0.098
+ 0.040

0
0.036

I + 0.043

+0.120
,+ 0.050

0
-0.043

N9

H9

To1 /- 12 1 To1
on

I on

+ 0.018
- 0.018

0.015
0.051

-++ 0.0215
-0.0215

-0.018
-0.061

35
4
4
5

75 j

85

22 X 9

22

I +0.052

+ 0.149
+ 0.065

0
0.052

+ 0.026
- 0.026

0.022 -z-+0
0.074
5.5

6
,w/.;062

182

+0.180
+0.080

0
0.062

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 6167 - 1971

2.3 Preferred

Length of Key
All dimensions in millimerres.

Key

Section

10

11

12

10

12

14

16

18

20

22.

25

20

32

36

1;
14
16
18

I;
1:

1
14
16
18

1
-

II
_

7
_

z
_

z
_

z
_

z
_

r
_

z
_

1
_

1
_

1
-

~~IIZE~17I~Z

::
25
:2

;:
::
32

s.
:;

:2
::

72
25
::

y*

II

11

:z

36

:z

::

36

::

36
40

45

:;

1:

::

::

45

75

11

::
63

::
63

z
90

18

:z

z:

::

::

:i

4:

7o

s
3
80
3 100
90
: 110

::

125
140
160
180
;!i
,250
2l30
320

1:
-

::

::

::

;;

::
90

80
1;:

;8

1:
125
140
-

110
,125
140
160
,-

16
63

1
63

80
90

z
100
90

;:
1::

;!I
100

1:
125
140
160
180

tt
125
140
160
180

110
125
140
160
180

110
125
140
160
180

200
-

200
220
-

220
200
250
-

..

360

70

90

110
125
140
160
180

100
110
125
140
160
180

100
110
125
140
160
180

100
110
125
140
160
180

220
200
250
280
-

220
200
250
280
320

220
200
250
280
320

220
200
250
280
320

.-

400

3. Designation
designated as:

360

360

400

A thin parallel key of Type A having width 10 mm, height 6 mm and length 25 mm shall be
Key A 10 X 6 X 25 IS : 6167

4. Tolerances

on Length of Key and Keyway

Length of Key

Tolerance on Key

Tolerance on Key way

up::28
32 to 80
90 and above

-_:2
- 0.3
- 0.5

+mz2
+ 0.3
+ 0.5

5. Material of Key -

HANDBOOK

Carbon

ON INDUSTRIAL

steel of tensile strength

FASTENEHS-PART

not less than 600 MN/m*

(60 kgf/mm2).

183

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

SECTION E
Miscellaneous

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

IS : 2995 - 1965
Indian Standard

DIMENSIONS
FOR
SET COLLARS
__-1.Forbword
1.1 This Indian Standard was adopted by the Indian Standards Institution on 27 January 1965, after the draft
inalized by the Machine Tools Sectional Committee had been approved by the Mechanical Engineering
Xvision Council.
1.2 This standard has been prepared with a view to unifying the dimensions of set collars used in general
ngineering for locking or locating bearings and other running parts in the axial direction, as well as to obtain
nterchangeability
of the collars with shafts. Set collars specified in this standard are suitable for shafts in the
liameter range of 2 mm to 200 mm. The diameter steps have been selected from the R20 series of preferred
lumbers. A heavy series of set collars has been provided in this standard, for use in cases where greater axial
oads have to be sustained, than is usual with bearings and similar applications.
1.3 While preparing

this standard,

assistance

has been derived from:

CSN 02 2910-1954 Stavtci Krouzky se stavecimi Srouby (Set rmgs for shafts). Ui&prO
normalizaci a
mzieni.
DIN 703-1955 Blanke Stellringe (Bright set collars - heavy pattern series). Deutscher Normenausschuss.
DIN 705-1955 Blanke Stellringe (Bright set collars - light pattern series). Deutscher Normenausschuss.
VSM 15210-1945 Bagues darret (Set rings - light series). Vereins Schweizerischer Maschinenindustrieller.
VSM
15212-1945
Bagues
darret
(Set, rings
heavy
series).
Vereins
Schweizerischer
Maschinenindustrieller.
VSM 13214-1945 Bagues darret (Set rings - heavy series - fixed by taper pin). Vereins Schweizerischer
Maschinenindustrieller.
1.4 For the purpose of deciding whether a particular requirement of this standard is complied with, the final
ralue, observed or calculated, expressing the result of a test, shall be rounded off in accordance with IS : 2-1960
Rules for rounding off numerical values (revised). The number of significant places retained in the rounded off
/alue should be the same as that of the specified value in this standard.
1. Scope
1.1 This standard
100 mm diameter

specifies the material and dimensions for set collars in the light series for shafts from 2 mm to
and in the heavy series for shafts from 10 mm to 150 mm diameter.

2. Material
2.1 The set collars shall be made from a suitable
wrought steel for general engineering purposes.

steel, such as St 37 according

to IS : 1570-1961 Schedules for

3. Dimensions
3.1 The dimensions
respectively.

of set collars

of the light and heavy series shall be as specified in Table

1 and Table 2

3.2 The grub screws shall be according to IS : 2388- 1963 Specification for slotted grub screws. They shall be of
the slotted head. Type C, for light series and socketed head, Type C, for the heavy series.
3.3 The taper pins shall be according

to IS : 2393-1963 Specification

for cylindrical

pins.

4. Designation
4.1 The set collars shall be designated

by the series, the type, the nominal

bore and the number

of this standard.

Example:
A light series set collar of Type A with a nominal

bore d, = 20 mm shall be designated

as:

Light Set Collar A20 IS : 2995

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

187

fS : 2995- 1965
TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

FOR LIGHT SERIES


( Clause 3.1 )

All dimensions

SET COLLARS

in millimetres.

dl= 2 TO 70rhm

dj=72

TO 200mm

TYPE A

---id, I--

---I
L-t

sx45

dl=

4 TO 150mm
TYPE

NOMINAL
4

H8
2
2.5
(3)
(3.5)
4
4.5
(5?5,
(6)
(7)
8
(9)
10
II
(12)
14
(15)
16
18
20
(22)
(24)
25
(26)
28
(30)
(32)

BORE

b
j14
3.5
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
8
8
8
10
10
10
12
12
12
12
14
14
14
16
16
16
16
16
16

dz

d,

hl3
,6
7
7
8
8
10
IO
12
12
12
16
18
20
20
22
25
25
28
32
32
36
40
40
40
45
45
50

M2
M2
M2
M2.5
M2.5
M3
M3
M4
M4
M4
M4
MS
M5
M5
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M6
M8
M8
ME
M8
MS
M8

HI1
-

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2
3
3
3
4
4
4
4
5
5
5
6
6
6
6
6
8

0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
0.4
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.0
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6

GRUB

TAPER

SCREW*

PlNSt

M2
X3
M2
X 3
M2
X3
M 2.5X
4
M2.5X
4
M3
X4
M3
X4
M4
X5
M4
X5
M4
X 5
M4
X6
MS
X 8
MS
X8
M5
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
X8
M6
x10
M6
x10
M6
x10
M8
X10
M8
x12
M8
X12
M8
x12

1.6 X
1.6X
1.6 X
1.6 X
1.6 X
2x
3x
3X
3X
4x
4x
4x
4x
5x
5x
5x
6X
6X
6X
6X
6X
8X

12
12
14
14
14
20
25
25
25
30
30
30
35
35
35
40
45
45
45
50
50
55

Conrrnued

188

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 2995- 1965
TABLE1

OlMENslONsFOR

DOLLARS

I,IGHTSER~ESSET

NOMINAL BORE
4

H8
(34)
(35)
(36)
(38)
,g
(Z)
50
(52)
(55)
56
(58)
(60)
63
(65)
(68)
(70)
(72)
(75)
80
(85)
90
(95)
100
110
(120)
125
(130)
140
(150)
160
(170)
180
(190)
200

Note - Non-preferred
*See 1S
tSee IS

conrd

GRUB

b
j14
16
16
16
16
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
18
20
20
20
20
20
20
22
22
22
22
22
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
32
32
32
32
32
size are indicated

d,

d,

h13
50
56
56
56
63
63
70

HI1
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
8
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
10
IO
12
12
12
12
12
12
16
18
16
16
-

1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4
4

.7O
80
80
80
80
90
90
90
100
100
100
110
110
110
125
125
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200
220
250
250
280
280

M8
M8
M8
M8
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2
M20X2

SCREW*

M8
M8
M8
M8
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
MI0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M16,
M20
M20
M20
M20

x12
x12
x12
x12
X 16
X 16
X 16
X 16
,X 16
X 16
X 16
X 16
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X 20
X20
X 25
X 25
X 25
X 25
x 30
x 30
x 30
X 30
x35
X 40
X 40
X 45
X 45

TAPER
PlNSt

8X
85
8X
8X
,8X
8X
8X
8X
10x
10x
10x
IO x
10x
10 x
10 x
10 x
10 x
10x
10 x
10 x
10 x
12 x
12 x
12 x
12 x
12 X
12 X
16 X
16 X
16 X
16 X
-

55
60
60
60
70
70
80
.80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
110
110
110
120
120
120
140
140
150
150
180
180
200
200
220
220

within brackets,

: 2388-1963.
: 2393-1963.

HANDBOOKONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3

189

IS :2995 - 1965
( &use
All dimensions

d,=10

3.1 )
in millimetres.

TO 65mm

dl=68

NOMINAI RORE

4
H8
IO
11
12
(13)
14
(15)
16
(17)
(!)
20
22
(24)
25
(26)
(Z)
32
(34)
(35)
36
(38)
40
(42)
45
(48)
50
(52)
(55)
56
(58)
(60)
63
(65)
(68)
(2)
(75)
(:z)
(i!)
100
110
(120)
125
(130)
140
(150)
Note -. Non-preferred
*See IS

size are indicated

b
j14
12
12
14
14
16
16
16
18
18
18
20
20
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
22
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
32
36
36
38
38

TO 150mm
GRUB SCREW

dz
h13
25
25
30
30
35
35
40
40
45
45
50
50
56
56
56
63
63
63
70
70
70
70
80
80
80
80
90
90
90
90
100
100
100
100
110
110
110
110
Ii5
125
125
140
140
160
160
180
180
200
200

Q
M6
M6
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
M8
MS
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
MI0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml0
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml2
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
Ml6
M20X2
M20X2

1.6.
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
I:6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.5
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
1.6
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
2.5
4
4
4
4

ms xx
M6 X8
M8 x12
M8 x12
M8 x 12
MS x12
M8 x12
M8 x 12
M8 x 12
M8 x 12
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
MI0 X 16
MlOX 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml0 X 16
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml2 X 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6X20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 x 20
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 X 25
Ml6 x 30
Ml6 X 30
M20 X 30
M20 x 30

within brackets,

: ;388-197 _
HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075(Part 1) - 1986

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR CIRCLIPS

Part 1 : For Shafts


( First Revision )

I. Scope
1.1 Covers the requirement
iO0 mm in heavy type.

of circlips for shafts of nominal

1.2 Additional information


like load-bearing
lave been given in Appendix A.
1. Symbols -

For the purpose

capacity, detachment

of this standard,

the following

a -

radial width of the lug

b -

beam (radial width of circlip opposite

c -

distance

do -

between

measuring

diameter range 3 to 300 mm in normal type and 15 to


speed, shape of groove and fitting of circlip

letter symbols

shall apply

the aperture)

plates for testing spiral flatness

shaft diameter

d2 -

groove diameter

& -

internal

diameter

of circlip not under tension

d4 -

maximum

ds -

diameter

of the lug holes

E -

modulus

of elasticity

symmetrical

diameter

of bore during

fitting

FN -

load-bearing

capacity

of groove at a yield point of the grooved material

FR -

load-bearing

capacity

of circlip with sharp-edged

FRg -

load-bearing

capacity

or circlip for abutment

ReL -

yield point

g -

edge chamfering

h -

distance

m n -

N~s -

distance

of the abutment

abutment

of 200N/mm*

of the pressing

with edge chamfering

distance

(see A-l.1

part (see A-12)


g (see A-l%

surface to the circlip

between the plates when testing conical deformation

groove width
edge margin
detachment

speed of the circlip (see A-2)

r -

curvature

in the groove base or test jaws

s -

thickness

of the circlip

t -

groove depth with nominal

3. Dimensions,

sizes of dl and d2

Tolerances and Design Data

3.1 Dimensions,

tolerances

and design data for circlips, normal type, shall be as given in Tablel, reaa wtth Fig.1

3.2 Dimensions,

tolerances

and design data for circlips, heavy type, shall be as given in Table 2, read with Fig. 1

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

ml

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

EXTERNAL

CLEARANCE

UNLOADED

*dl B 170mm
DETAILS

AT x

ASSEMBLED
Note 1 - Location of the lug hole shall be such that it leaves uniform material all round.
Note 2 - Unloaded shape of ring at manufacturers discretion.
*At manufacturers discretion.

FIG. 1

192

DIMENSIONS

FOR CIRCLIPS

FOR SHAFTS

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENERS-PART

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS


(CIguse3,l;ahdFig.
I)
All dimensions

Shaft
Dim d,
Nom
Size

Circlip

Size

s
F Tolerance

da
Size

Tolerance

dzt

ds

3.7

0.6

4.7

Z:P:

TYPE

mS
Tolerance

Min

1.9

0.8

2.8

-: 04
i (hi0)

0.5

2.2

0.9

3.8

-:.048

0.5

0. I

0.3

8.6

2.5

1.1

4.8

0.7

0. I

0.3

10.3

0.8

0.15

0.5

0.9

0.15

-00.06

0.9

@IO)

1.1

$$l

Nh

FR ]n

FN

&

(h 1.0)

Design Data #
n

Max

. f 0.02.
0.4

NORMAL

Groove
b*

Size

2.7

in millimetres.

Min

HI3

WV

Min-

0.47

1 0.5

1 0.27

1 360 000

0.20

0.50

0.5

0.30

211 000

0.26

1.00

0.5

0.80

154 000

11.7

0.46

1.45

0.5

0.90

114 000

0.5

13.5

0.54

2.60

0.5

1.40

121 000

0.2

0.6

14.7

0.81

3.00

0.5

2.00

96 000

0.2

0.6

16

0.92

3.50

0.5

2.40

85 000

1.1

0.2

0.6

17

1.01

4.00

2.40

84 000

1.1

0.25

0.8

18

1.40

4.50

2.40

70 000

1.1

0.25

0.8

19

1.53

5.00

2.40

75 000

1.1

0.3

0.9

20.2

2.00

5.80

2.40

66 000

1.1

0.3

0.9

21.4

2.15

6.35

2.40

58 000

1.1

0.35

1.1

22.6

2.66

6.90

2.40

50 000

1.1

0.4

1.2

23.6

3.26

7.40

2.40

45 000

1.1

0.4

1.2

25

3.46

8.00

2.40

41 000

I
0.4

FOR SHAFTS

1 0.1 1

1.3

1.5

0.5
I

I
0.3

I
7

26.2
I

0.15

0.5

1.5

27.2

17.0

4.58
I

1.3

4.84.

1.5
I

17.0

3.75

Nom
Gze 0
liers /

10

39 000
I

1.5

3.80

35 000

1.3

0.5

1.5

28.4

5.06

17.1

1.5

3.85

32 000

1.3

0.5

1.5

29.6

5.36

16.8

1.5

3.75

29 000

1.3

0.5

1.5

30.8

5.65

16.9

1.5

3.80

27 000

19

1(Co hued
-

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

All dimensions

FOR SHAFTS

NORMAL

TYPE-Contd

..
w

in millimetres.

%
Shaft .
Dia dl
Nom

Circlip
Is.
Size

1 Tole- 1

ds
Size

Design Data $

Groove
a

b*

Max

=I

d5

1 Tole-

At
Size

rance

Min

mt

I Tolerance

WI

W)

I
I
1

FN

FR

I
Min

H13

i FRB 1 Ndr
1~1
Min.
NV

4.4

22.9

1.3

0.55

1.7

33.2

6.75

16. I

1.5

3.65

27 000

4.4

23.9

1.3

0.55

1.7

34.2

7.05

16.2

1.5

3.70

25 000

4.5
4.7

3.1

24.9

3.2

26.6

26.9

4.8

3.4

27.6

27.9

3.5

28.6

29.6

5.2

3.6

2.5

30.3

23.2
24.2
25.9

+0.41
l-O.42

_
32.2

5.4

i Nom
I Size 0
Pliers 1

19

-:_:

5.6

jfconrinued)

5
Y

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

All dimensions

FOR SHAFTS

in millimetres.

NORMAL

TYPE-Conrd

TABLE

DIMkNSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

FOR SHAFTS

NORMAL

t;

TYPE-Conrd

( Cluuse 3.1; and Fig. I )


i All dimensions in millimetres.

*Dimension
t.Yee A-3.1.
$See A-3.2.

b shall not exceed dimension

a MU.

The design data apply only to circlips of spring steel as per 1s : 2507-1975 Specification
IIPliers conforming to IS: 7990-1976 Specification for pliers for external &clips.

for cold rolled steel strips f&r spring Cfirsr revision),

dq is calculated

from dd = dl + 2.1 a.

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

Circlio

t
Tole-

d,
Size

rance

b*

Max

Min

4.8

2.4

14.3

2.5.

---~a
tT---k-!

2
2

15.2
16.2

17

2
2

19
21

Size

Tole-

13.8
14.7
15.7

+0.10
^ ^,

16.5
f 0.05

18.5
20.5

-l-O.13
5.5
-0.42 ._
6

I22.2

H
23.2

25.9

5.1

+0.21
-0.42

! 2.7

HEAVY

TYPE

Tolerance

-00.1,
(hII)

3
3.1

FOR SHAFTS

Groo
dzt

i d5

rance

AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS


( Clause 3.2 and Fig. I )
All dimensions in millimttres.

-00.13
(hll)

1.85

0.5

1.5

31.6

5.06

36.3

1.5

8.20

36 000

1.85

0.5

1.5

34.6

5.65

36.0

1.5

8.10

29 000

1.85

0.55

1.7

37.3

6.75

34.2

1.5

7.60

29 200

2.15

0.55

1.7

38.5

7.05

45.0

1.5

10.3

25 000

27.9
29.6

(Continued)

TABLE 2

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

All dimensions

FOR SHAFTS

HEAVY TYPE -Conrd

in millimetres.
Design Data 4

da

Min

4.5

69.3

FN

FR

(kN)

(kN)

39.7

165

2.5

FRg

Ndr

(kN)

Mine

26.0

Nom
Size 01
Pliers 1,

9 850
I
40

*Dimension b shall not exceed dimension (I Max.


tSee A-3.1.
$See A-3.2.
J The design data apply to circlips of spring steel as per IS: 2507-1975,
/(Pliers conforming to IS: 799&1976.

bq is calculated

from d, = dl + 2. I a.

5.3

106

16.2

383

59.4

5 710

5.3

111.5

80.8

386

61.0

4 980

5.3

122.1

90.0

368

3.5

51.6

4 180

85

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986


4. Material and Hardness
4.1 The circlips shah be manufactured
from spring steel such as 70 C6 or 75 C6 as per IS: 2507-1975
Specification for cold rolled steel strips for springs Cfirst revision).
of circlips shall be as given below :

4.2 Hardness

Nominal Diameter
of Circlips
Over

Hardness
Upto
48

470 to 580 Vickers


hardness
(Corresponding to 47 to 54 Rockwell C hardness)

48

200

435 to 530 Vickers hardness (Corresponding


to 44 to 51 Rockwell C hardness)

200

300

390 to 470 Vickers hardness (Corresponding


to 40 to 47 Rockwell C hardness)

Note - Hardness values converted


metallic materials yirsr revision).

5.

as per IS: 4258-1982 Hardness

conversion

tables for

Designation

5.1 A circlip for shaft diameter


designated as:

(nominal

size)di = 40 mm and thickness

Circlip 40 X 1.75 N IS: 3075 (Part


5.2 A circlip for shaft diameter
designated as:

(nominal

type (N), shall be

1)

size) dl = 40 mm and thickness

Circlip 40 X 2.5 H IS: 3075 (Part

1.75 mm, normal

2.5 mm, heavy type (H), shall be

1)

6. Finish
6.1 Ali sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations
and other defects.
6.1.1 The maximum permissible deviation on the profile at engaging
between the manufacturer
and the user in case of special application.

lip may also be mutually

agreed upon

6.2 Unless any alternative finish is spcified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
blackened or Phosphated to class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment for iron and steel for protection
against corrosion.
The coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate
treatment
to avoid hydrogen
embrittlement.
Note - In the case of circlips with electroplated
surface protection, the upper limit of the circlips thickness S may be exceeded
according to the film thickness of the plating required. Thisshall be taken into acccount in the design of the groove.

7. Tests
7.1 Testing of Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method for Vickers hardness
metallic materials: Part 1 HV 5 to HV 100 (second revision).
7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance
scales) for steels Cfirst revision).
Notii 1 -

In case of doubt,

Note 2 -

In case of circlips,

7.2 Bend Test and Fracture


7.2.1 The testing

the Vickers hardness


the hardness

test for

with IS : 1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C

test applies.

test is regarded

as a destructive

test.

Test

of the circlip for ductility

shall be carried out in accordance

with Fig. 2.

__

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENEKS-PART

199

---

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

FIG. 2 BEND TEST AND FRACTURE

TEST

7.2.2 One half of the circlip is clamped between two jaws, of which one has a radius equal to the thickness of
the c&lip. The circlip is bent through 30 by repeated light hammer blows or with a lever, following which there
shall be no fractures or cracks in the circlip. The circlip is then further bent until fracture occurs. The fracture
surface shall reveal a fine-grained structure.
7.3 Deformation

Test

7.3.1 Testing the conical deformation - The circlip is placed between two parallel plates and loaded in
accordance with Fig. 3. The distance h--s measured under force Fshall not exceed the maximum value stated as
given in Table 3.

FIG. 3 TESTING

TABLE 3

THE CONICAL

DEFORMATION

TESTING THE CONICAL DEFORMATION


( Clause 73.1 and Fig. 3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

200

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS--PART

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986


7.3.2

Testing the spiral flatness

7.3.2.1
Fig. 4):

The circlip shall fall through

Nominal

Diameter

of Circlips

Over

IJp to

100

1.5 x s

100

1.8 X s

FIG. 4
7.4 Testing the Function

two parallel planes with a clearance c as given in table below (read with

(Permanent

TESTING

THE SPIRAL

FLATNESS

Set and Grip Test)

7.4.1 The circlip is passed five times over a cone with a diameter of 1.Ol dl in accordance with Fig. 12 (see A-4)
and then be fitted on to a shaft of minimum groove diameter dz where it shall remain under its own weight.
7.5 Acceptance

Testing

7.5.1 Table 4 applies to features,

while Table 5 applies for the acceptance

TABLE 4

FEATURES

ACCEPTABLE

Acceptable

TEST

For Testing

Quality

dj

QUALITY

LEVEL

Level AQL*
For Testing of Faulty

of Features

* Refer IS: 2500 (Part I)-1973 Sampling


by count of defects vrsr revision).

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Parts

1.5

HANDBOOK

level (AQL).

Features
Circlip thickness, s
Circlip internal diameter,
Conical deformation
Spiral flatness
Function (set and ario)

TABLE

FOR ACCEPTANCE

quality

inspection

tables: Part

I Inspection

by attributes

and

IS: 3075 (Part 1) - 1986


8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable

and Packing
anti-corrosive

surface treatment

shall be given to the circlips for protection

during

transit.

8.2 Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed in cartons of 100, 500 and I 000 or multiples
Each carton shall contain circlips of one size only.

thereof.

9. Marking
9.1 The lable on the carton
trade-mark.
9.2 CertiJi:cation Marking

shall carry the designation,


-

Details available

number

with the Bureau of Indian

APPENDIX
( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL

of pieces and of the manufacturers

name or

Standards.

INFORMATION
FOR LOAD-BEARING
CAPACITY,
DETACHMENT
SHAPE OF.GROOVE
AND FITTING OF CIRCLIPS

SPEED,

A-l. Load-Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for the load-bearing capacity
of the groove FN and for the load-bearing
capacity of the circlip FR. In each case the weaker part is that which
applies. The load-bearing
capacities (FN, FR F& given in 3, contain no safety, neither against yielding under
staticstress
nor against fatigue fracture under fluctuating stress. There shall be at least twice the level of safety
against fracture under static stress.
A-l.1 Load-Bearing Capacit.v of Groove, FN - The load-bearing capacity of the groove FN in 3 applies for a
yield point of the material in the region of the shaft groove of Rer = 200 N/mm* as well as for the given nominal
groove depths t and edge margins n. The load-bearing capacity FN for deviating groove depths t(resulting from
deviating shaft diameters dl and /or deviating groove diameters d2) and yield points Rfer.is directly proportional
to the groove depth and the yied point :
FN = ,N..RL
t
200
A-I.2 Load-Bearing Capacity of Cjrcljp, FR - The load-bearing capacity of the h-clip FR in accordance with 3
applies to a sharp-edged abutment of the pressing machine part (see Fig. 5).
The values
and FRg apply to
different material
circlip is directly

F,Q apply to an
circlip materials
with a different
proportional
to

abutment with an edge chamfering distance g (see Fig. 6). The two values FR
with a modulus of elasticity (E-modulus) of 210 000 N/mm*. If circlips of a
E modulusE are used, then, for conversion, the load-bearing
capacity of the
the modulus of elasticity.
FR = FR .

FR~ = F,Q~.

f?
210 000

FIG. 5

202

SHARP

EDGE ABUTMENT

, and

lT
210 000

FIG. 6 ABUTMENT
WITH EDGE CHAMFERING
DISTANCE
(CHAMFERING
OR ROUNDING)

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

bearing

If the existing edge chamfering distance gdeviates from the values in 3 then, for conversion;
capacity of the circlip is indirectly proportional
to the edge chamfering distance.
FR~ = Fe If F.Q with small values ofg is greater

Note -

thanF,+

g
7
R
then FR applies,

If the existing forces, because of too great an edge chamfering distance cannot
sharp-edged abutment shall be created by means of a supporting ring (see Fig. 7)

FIG. 7

SHARP

EDGE

ABUTMENT

the load-

WITH

SUPPORTING

be accomodated,

then a

RING

A-2. Detachment Speed, Nds - The application of circlips is limited by speeds at which pretension is relieved by
centrifugal force and at which the circlip starts to lift from its seating in the groove base. In Table 1 and Table 2,
detachment speed N ds are given at which the circlips start to become detached from their seating in the groove
(groove diameter=nominal
diameter). Actual release of the circlip can be expected only after a further increase of
speeds by 50 percent. The values apply to circlips made of spring steels shall be as specified in 4.2.
A-3. Shape of Groove
A-3.1 Groove Diameter, d2 the groove with pretension.
Note -

The groove diameters

Smaller groove diameters

d2 specified in 3 are selected so that the circlips are seated in

are possible if pretension

can be dispensed.

The lower limit is:

dZ Min = d, Max

A-3.2 Groove Width, m - As a rule, for the groove width specified in Table 1 and Table 2, the tolerance zone
H 13 applies. With unilateral power transmission,
the grooves can be widened and/or chamfered towards the
unloaded side. The groove width has no influence on the load-bearing capacity of the circlip connection; Intraplant specified groove shapes and groove widths are therefore possible.
If the circlips is to be subjected to alternate power tansmission
shall as far as possible, for example, also by reducing the tolerance,
groove shapes, see Fig. 8 to 11).

on both groove edges, the groove width m


be matched to the circlip thickness, s (for

Um
FIG. 8 GROOVE

SHAPE

FIG. 9 GROOVE

SHAPE

__^.__

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

203

_.-----a

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

FIG.

10 GROOVE

SHAPE

A-3.3 Shape of Groove Base - A square shape is the normal type of groove base (see Fig. 8). The radius r on the
load side shall not exceed 0.1 s. Other successful shapes of groove are shown in Fig. 9 to 11. In the case of a sharpedged square groove, the notch sensitivity of the material used produces a corresponding
fatigue notch factor.
A-4. Fitting
A-4.1

of Circlips

Pliers in accordance

with IS : 7990-1976 shall preferably

be used for fitting the circlips.

A-4.1.1 When fitting, make absolutely sure that the circlips are not overspread, that is, are not opened further
than is necessary for fitting over the shaft. If necessary, pliers with opening restriction (set screw) shall be used.
The safest protection against overspreading
is fitting with the aid of cones (see Fig. 12).
PRESSURE SLEEVE

FIG. 12 FITTING

WITH

CONES

HANDBOOK ON INDUSTRIAL FASTENEk-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 1) - 1986

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was issued in 1965, as a comprehensivestandard


based on draft DIN 471-1963 for
dimensions.
Subsequently
in 1981 the DIN standard was revised completely incorporative
of testing and
acceptance requirements,
but sizes and range remain the same.
The Committee, responsible for formulation
bring it in line with the relevant DIN standard.

of this Indian

Standard

(IS : 3075), decided to revise it to

Circlips made from carbon spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
retaining components in assembly. Normally, the circlips are axially assembled either over shafts or inside bores.
When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the circlip protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be; a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
with the shoulder providing a sharp-cornered
abutment; or a ball bearing with a radiused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder; or a gear wheel with a sharpened edege which will also have contact
with.only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
from that of the sharp cornered abutment.
Thus the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, namely, the circlip, the groove and the
retained part. In case of axial load transmission,
the circlip serves as a means of transfering the load from the
retained part to the groove wall. However, in cases of impact loading, the energy absorbing capacity of the circlip
will be an important factor. The more energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
Earlier standard dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, IS : 3075-1965 has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with latest DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and IS1 certification marking clauses have also been included.
This standard is Part I which covers requirements of circlips to be assembled over shaft, generally based
on DIN 471-1981 Circlips (retaining rings) for shafts-normal
type and heavy type. In addition to this, the
requirements for radially assembled type of circlips, commonly known as Etype circlips; used for smaller shafts
have been covered in Part 3 of this standard. Other two parts of the standard in this series are:
Part 2 : Specification

for circlips for bores (based on DIN 472-1981); and

Part 3 : Specification

for criclips, Type E for shafts (based on DIN 6799-1981).

HANDlbUOK ON INDUSTRIALFASTENERS

-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

tiOR CIRCLIPS

Part 2 For Bores


( First Revision )

.. Scope

..l Covers the requirement


00 mm in heavy type.

of circlips for bores of nominal

,.2 Additional
4ppendix A.

like load bearing capacity, shape of groove and fitting of circlip have been given in

information

diameter range 8 to 300 mm in normal type and 20 to

!. Symbols
!.l

For the purpose

of this standard,

the following

letter symbols

shall apply:

a -- radial width of the lug


b c -

beam,(radial
distance

width of circlip opposite

between

dl -

bore diameter

& -

groove diameter

dj 1 external

diameter

measuring

plates for testing spiral flatness

of the circlip not under tension

d4 -

minimum

ds -

diameter

of the lug holes

E -

modulus

of elasticity

FN -

the aperture)

symmetrical

diameter

of bore during

fitting

load-bearing

capacity

of groove at a yield point of the grooved material of 200 N/mm* (see A-1.1)

FR -- load-bearing

capacity

of circlip with sharp-edged

capacity

of circlip for abutment

FRR -

load-bearing

ReL -

yield point

g -

edge chamfering

h -

distance

m -

distance

abutment

of the pressure

with edge chamfering

of the surface abutting

distance

part (see A-1.2)


g (see A-1.2)

against the circlip

between the plates when testing conical deformation

groove width

n -

edge margin

r -

curvature

in the groove base or test jaws

s -

thickness

of the circlip

1-

groove depth with nominal

3. Dimensions,

Tolerances

sizes of dl and dz.

and Design Data

3.1 Dimensions,

tolerances

and design data for circlips, normal type, shall be as given in Table I, read with Fig.

3.2 Dimensions,

tolerances

and design data for circlips, heavy type, shall be as given in Table 2, read with Fig. I

206

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

rb

UNLOADED

d, s

d 3

300mm

dy225mm

170mm

DETAILS

AT X

ASSEMBLED
Note 1 -

Location

Note 2 -

Unloaded

* At manutacturers

FIG.

of the lug hole shall be such that it leaves uniform


shape of ring at manufacturers

material

all round.

discretion.

discretion.

DIMENSIONS

FOR CIRCLIPS

FOR BORES

4. Material and Hardness


4.1 The circlips
shall be manufactured
from spring steel of grade
Specification for cold rolled steel strip for springs yirst revision).

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

7OC6 or 7X6

as per IS : 2507-1975

207

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

FOR BORES

NORMAL

TYPE

( Cluuse 3. I and Fig. I)

All dimensions
Cirelip
s

d,

in millimetres.

b*

ds

Max

Min

2.4

I. I

2.5

1.3

ht

Design Data@

Groove

I
0

da

Min

FR

FN

Size

To1

HI3

8.4

+to9

0.9

0.2

0.6

0.86

9.4

(Hll)

0.9

0.2

0.6

3.7

0.96

WV

F.QC

L?

; (kN)
j
I

Nom
Size
of
Pliers

WY

2.00

0.5

I.50

2.00

0.5

I.50

/
0.6

3.3

1.08

1
8

4.00

0.5

2.20

0.2

0.6

4. I

1.17

4.00

0.5

2.30

1. I

0.25

0.8

4.9

1.60

4.00

0.5

+Y

I. I

0.3

0.9

5.4

2.10

4.20

0.5

WI)

I.1

0.3

0.9

6.2

2.25

4.50

0.5

1.7

I. I

0.35

111

7.2

2.80

5.00

0.5

2.30

1.7

I. I

0.4

1.2

3.40

5.50

2.60

2. I

1.7

I. I

0.4

1.2

6.00

/
I
1

I.1

0.2

1.2

1.1

I.7

1.5

3.6

1.8

I.5

I4

3.7

1.9

1.7

I5

3.7

I6

3.8

I7

3.9

3.2

1.4

1.2

II

3.3

1.5

I2

3.4

I3

10.4

1
I

18

4. I

2.2

I9

4. I

2.2

20

4.2

2.3

21

4.2

2.4

I9
+0.13
(H? 1)
22

8.8
I

3.60
1

I. I

0.5

1.5

9.4

4.80

I. 1

0.5

1.5

10.4

5.10

I. 1

0.5

I. I

0.5

I.5

11.2

1.5

12.2

I
I

1
1

2.30
2.30

I
,

2.30

2.50

6.50

6.80

f
/

2.60

2.50
2.50

5.40

7.20

/
j
I

5.70

7.60

2.60

22

4.2

2.5

23

I. I

0.5

1.5

13.2

5.90

24

4.4

2.6

25.2

1.3

0.6

1.8

14.8

j
I

7.70

13.9

/
I
f

4.60

25

4.5

2.7

26.2

1.3

0.6

1.8

15.5

8.00

14.6

4.70

26

4.7

2.8

27.2

1.3

0.6

1.8

16. I

13.85

4.60

28

4.8

2.9

29.4

1.3

0.7

2. I

l7:9

4.50

1.3

0.7

2. I

19.9

13.7

4.60

0.85

2.6

20

13.8

j
!

4.70

30
31

4.8
5.2

3
3.2

2.5

+ 0.21
0
(Hl2)

+0.25
0

31.4
1

32.7

(H12)
I

1.3

.-

8.00

2.70

I9
t

8.40

I 10.5
I
! 11.3

j
/

14.1

1
I

13.3

TABLE 1 DIMENSIONS AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS FOR BORES - NORMAL TYPE-Co&
All dimensions in millimetres.
Des&~ Data8

GrMWe

dzt

ds

dr

45.5

+ 0.9
-0.39

5.9

33.1

1.3

0.85

2.6

20.6

14.6

13.8

4.10

2.5

3k.l

1.6

0.85

2.6

22.6

15.4

26.2

1.5

6.30

26.4

22.5

28.2

1.5

6.70

To1

Min

H13

1.85

4.1

1.25
I

2.5

27.8

3.8
I

1 29.6
1 32

1 30.2

1.25

3.8

33.5

2.5

50.5

1.85

1.25

3.8

2.5

53

2.15

1.5

4.5

2.5

59

2.5

61

2.5

63

2.5

65

25

66

41

1.75

50.5

6.4

4.4

2.5

48

1.75

51.5

6.4

4.5

50.

54.2

6.5

9.6

2
I

44.7
I

1.85

4.3

28.4
I

49.5

6.2

1.25 1 3.8

48.5

OrN)

44.6

21.0
1

1.85 1

1.75

W)

2.5

45

@NJ

FRO

Size

3.8
1.75

Fil

Min

42

FN

8.30
I

8.40
I

43.1 I

31.4

43.5

8.30.

34.5

32.0

43.2

8.40

36.3

40.5

60.8

Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11

8.20

121

+t30

40

(Hl2)

65

25

69.2

7.6

5.8

68

265

1.5

4.5

49

51.8

121

68

25

72.5

7.8

6.1

71

265

1.5

4.5

51.6

54.5

121.5

25

20.8

25

21.2

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR.CIRCLIPS

FOR BORES -

NORMAL

G
..

TYPE-Conrd

g
All dimensions

in millimetres.

2:

d,

72
75
t

I--

98

100

k
102

105

t- 108
110

I=

117

112

119

I15

120

127

125

132

I=
1

f 0.08

122

+1.5
-0.63

--

(Continued)

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN DATA

FOR ClRCLlPS

All dimensions

I
To1

Size

(I

ds

NORMAL

TYPE-Cm&

in millimetres.

. Circlip
d3

FOR BORES -

dzt
To1

hoove
4

HI3

d4

Min

Design Data6
FN

FR

@N)

&N)

138

374

FRG

&NJ

Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11

I
137

4.15

106.9

69.0

142
147
152

+0.63

158

$3)

164
169
I

0.08

174.5
179.5
184.5
189.5
194.5

125

199.5
204.5
209.5

+ 0.72
(H?3)

222

0.09

232

5.15

190.2

349

574

85.0

242

5.15

200.2

365

549

81.0

252

+0.81
0

5.15

210.2

380

525

77.5

262

(HI31

5.15

220.2

396

504

75.0
(Conrinueaj

TABLE

DIMENSIO&S

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

All dimensions

FOR BORES

NORMAL

TYPE-Conrd

in millimetres.

Cireli
Bore
Dia d,
Nom
Size

Size

260

270

To1

Size

To1

275

16.2

16

268

285

16.2

16

278

+tsl

16.2

16

288

Wl3)

f0.09
280

295

+ 2.0
-0.81

290

305

16.2

16

298

300

315

16.2

16

308

5.15

*Dimension b shall not exceed dimension (I Max.


t See A-3.1.
*See A-3.2.
@he design data apply to circlips of spring steel as per IS : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strip for springs (first
(1Pliers conforming to IS : 7989-1976 Specification for pliers for internal circlips.

12

266

revision) , d, is calculated

636

1 466

from d, = dl -

2.1 0.

69.0

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

r.4

c%
-

ti

m
d

t-i

c
d

3
Ici

ci
0.
ti
c.
.i

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

213

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN

DATA

FOR CIRCLIPS

All dimensions
Circlir,

Tol

*
Max

b*

ds

Min

HEAVY

TYPE-Conrd

in millimetres
Design Datn

Groove

FOR BORES

dzt

4
To1

Size

d,

Min

HI3

I
1.5

1 4.5

1 32.2

1.5

4.5

49.5

FN

FR

(W

WY

44.4

94.7

Nom
Size
of
Pliers 11

FRG

WV

1 2

19.6

1.5

4.5
I

*Dimension
t+e A-3.1.
. ^_

b shall not exceed dimension

: 2507-1975,

dq is calculated

from d4 = dl -

51.1
I

174.5

56.2
I

1 2.5

171
I

30.6

2.5
I

30.3

4.5

52.7

58.0

172

2.5

30.3

1.5

4.5

55.5

60.0

170

2.5

30.3

1.75

5.3

60

14.6

308

2.5

56.0

2.1 a.

40

1.5

a Max.

to circlips of spring steel as per IS

54.5

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

1
4.2 Hardness of the circlips shall be as given below:
Nominal

Over

diameter

of Circlips

UP to

Hardness
I

48
I

470 to 580 Vickers hardness (Corresponding to 47 to 54 Rockwell C hardness)

48

200

I 435
to to44530
to 51
Vickers
Rockwell
hardness
C hardness)
(Corresponding

200

300

I 390
to to40470
to 47
Vickers
Rockwell
hardness
C hardness)
(Corresponding

) Note - Hardness values converted in accordance with IS: 4258-1982 Hardness conversion tables
i for metallic materials Cfirsr revisions.

5. Designation
5.1 A circlip for bore diameter (nominal size) di = 40 mm and thickness = 1.75 mm, normal type (N), shall be
designated as:

Circlip 40 X 1.75 N IS: 3075 (Part 2)


5.2 A circlip for bore diameter (nominal size) di = 40 mm and thickness = 2 mm, heavy type (H), shall be
designated as:
Circlip 40 X 2 H IS: 3075 (Part 2)
6. Finish
6.1 All sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations

and other defects.


6.1.1 The maximum permissible deviation on the profile at engaging lip may also be mutually agreed upon
between the manufacturer and the user in case of special application.
6.2 Unless any alternative finish is specified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
blackened or phosphated to Class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection
against corrosion. These coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate treatment to avoid hydrogen
embrittlement.
Note - In case of circlips with electroplated surface protection, the upper limit of the circlip thickness smay beexceeded according
to the film. This shall be taken into account in the design of the groove.

7. Tests
7.1 Testing the Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method of Vickers hardness test for
metallic material: Part 1 HV5 to HV 100 (second revision).
7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1968 Methods of Rockwell hardness test (Band C
scales) for steels yirst revision). In case of doubt, the Vickers hardness test applies. In case of circlips, the
hardness test is regarded as a destructive test.

7.2 Bend Test and Fracture Test


7.2.1 The testing of the circlip for ductility shall becarried

FIG. 2

out in accordance with Fig. 2.

BEND TEST AND FRACTURE TEST

HANDBOOK ON INDUSIRIAL FASTENERS -PART 3

215

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986


7.2.2 One half of the circlip is clamped between two jaws, of which one has a radius equal to the thickness of
the circlip. The circlip is bent through 30 by repeated light hammer blows or with a lever, following which there
shall be no fractures or cracks in the circlip. The circlip is then further bent until fracture occurs. The fracture
surface shall reveal a fine-grained structure.
7.3 Deformation

Test

7.3.1 Testing the conical deformation


- The circlip is placed between two parallel plates and loaded in
accordance with Fig. 3. The distance h--s measured under force F shall not exceed the maximum value as given
in Table 3.
F

FIG. 3

TESTING

TABLE 3

THE CONICAL

All dimensions

in millimetres.

Force Fin N f 5%

Nominal Diameter of Circlips


Over

DEFORMATION

TESTING THE CONICAL DEFORMATION


c Clause 7.3.1; and Fig. 3 )

up to

Normal

Type

22

30

60

38

40

80

38

82

60

120

82

150

80

160

150

300

150

300

22

7.3.2 Testing the spiralflatness


- The circlip shall fall through
given in table below (read with Fig. 4):
Nominal

diameter

100

FIG. 4
216

b X 0.03

h x 0.02

two parallel

of Circlips

planes with a clearance

of c as

up to

Over
1
I

h-s
Max

Heavy Type

TESTING

100

1.5 x s

1.8Xs

THE SPIRAL

FLATNESS

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986


7.4 Testing the Function (Permanent

Set and Grip Test)

The circlip shall be inserted five times into a conicallbore with a diameter of 0.99 d,, in accordance with
Fig. 12 (see A-3) and then be fitted into a bore with maximum groove diameter dz where it shall be held under its
own height.
7.5 Acceptance

Testing

7.5.1 Table 4 applies to the features,

while Table 5 applies for the acceptable

TABLE 4

FEATURES FOR ACCEPTANCE

quality

level (AQL).

TESTS

Function (set and grip)


TABLE 5 ACCEPTABLE

QUALITY LEVEL

Acceptable Quality Level AQL*

For testing of features

For testing of faulty parts

1.5
* Refer1%2500(Part ])-I%? hnphng inspection tables: Part 1 Inspection by attributes and
by count of defects (firsr revision).

8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable

!
/
I

and Packing
anti-corrosive

surface treatment

shall be given to the circlips for protection

8.2 Packing - Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed


multiples thereof. Each carton shall contain circlips of one size only.

in cartons

during

transit.

of 100, 500 and

1000 or

9. Marking
9.1 The lable on the carton shall carry the designation,
mark.
9.2 Certification

Marking

Details available

number of pieces and the manufacturers

with the Bureau of Indian

APPENDIX

name or trade-

Standards.

( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION
GROOVE

FOR LOAD-BEARING
CAPACITY,
AND FITTING OF CIRCLIP

SHAPE

OF

A-l. Load-Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for the load bearing capacity
of the groove FN and for the load-bearing
capacity of the circlip FR. In each case the weaker part is that which
applies. The load-bearing
capacities (FN, F,Q,F,Q.)given in 3 contain no safety neither against yielding under static
load nor against fatigue fracture under fluctuating load. There shall be at least twice the level of safety against
fracture under static load.
A-l.1 Load-Bearing Capacity of Groove, FN - The load-bearing
capacity of the groove FN in 3 applies for a
yield point of the material in the region of the bore groove of R,L - 200 N / mm2 as well as for the given nominal
groove depths t and edge margins n. The load-bearing
capacity FNfor deviating groove depths t'(resulting from
deviating bore diameters dl and/or deviating groove diameters dz) and yield points R,r is directly proportional
to the groove depth and the yield point:
FN=F~.t:.R_Iek
t
200

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

217

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986


A-l.2 Load-Bearing Capacity of Circlip FR - Thd load-bearing
capacity of the circlip FR in accordance
clause 3 applies to a sharpedged
abutment of the pressing machine part (see Fig. 5).

with

CIRCCIP

FIG. 6

ABUTMENT

WITH

EDGE

CHAMFERING

DISTANCE

(CHAMFERING

OR ROUNDING)

The two values FR and FJQapply to circlip materials with a modulus of elasticity (E-modulus) of 210 000
N/mmz. If circlips of a different material with a different E-modulus Eare used, then, for conversion, the loadbearing capacity of the circlip is directly propotional
to the modulus of elasticity.
FR = FR .

E
210 000

F& = FRg .

210 000
If the existing edge chamfering distance g deviates from the values in 3 then, for conversion,
bearing capacity of the circlip is indirectly proportional
to the edge chamfering distance:
FR~ = FRg, - g

the load-

g
Note -

If FfRg with small values of g is greater

than FR, then FR applies.

If the existing forces, because of too great an edge chamfering distance cannot be accommodated,
sharp-edged abutment shall be created by means of a supporting ring (see Fig. 7).
CIRCLIP
7

FIG. 7

SHARP-EDGED

then a

SUPPORTING
RXG

ABUTMENT

WITH

SUPPORTING

RING

A-2. Shape of Groove


A-2.1 Groove Diameter, dz the groove with pretension.
Note -

Larger

groove diameters

The groove diameters

are possible if pretension

d2 specified in 3 are selected so that the circlips are seated in


can be dispensed

with the upper limit is:

d, Mox = d, Min

A-2.2 Groove Width, m -- As a rule, for the groove width specified in Tables 1 and 2, the tolerance zone HI3
applies. With unilateral power transmission,
and grooves can be widened and/or chamfered towards the
unloaded side. The groove width has no influence on the load-bearing capacity of the circlip connection. Groove
shapes and groove H

218

IS: 3075(Part2)-1986
power transmission
reducing tolerance,

FIG. 8

FIG.

10

on both groove edges, the groove width m shall, as far as possible, for example,
be matched to the circlip thickness s (for groove shape, see Fig. 8 to 11):

GROOVE

SHAPE

FIG. 9

GROOVE

SHAPE

FIG. 11

GROOVE

GROOVE

also by

SHAPE

SHAPE

A-2.3

Shape of Groove Base - A square shape is the normal type of groove base (see Fig. 8). The radius r on the
load side shall not exceed 0.1 s. Other successful shapes of groove are shown in Fig. 9 to 11. In the case of sharpedgeds quare groove, the notch sensitivity of the material used produces a corresponding
fatigue notch factor.
A-3. Fitting the Circlip
A-3.1

Pliers in accordance

with IS : 7989-1976 shall preferably

be used for fitting the circhps.

A-3.1.1 When fitting,, make absolutely sure that the circlips are not overstrained, that is, are not squeezed
further together than is necessary for insertion into the bore. If necessary, pliers with closing restriction (set
screw) shall be used. The safest protection against overstretching is fitting with the aid of cones (see Fig. 12).

FIG.

1JANDBOOK ON IKDUSlXIAL

12

PASTICNEBS--PAW

FITTING

WITH

CONES

219

IS : 3075 (Part 2) - 1986

EXPLANATORY

NOTE

This standard was issued in 1965, as a part of comprehensive standard which was based on draft DIN 4721963 for dimensions.
Subsequently,
DIN standard was revised completely with the inclusion of testing and
acceptance requirements.
However, the sizes and range remain the same as that of earlier DIN version.
The committee, responsible
with the relevant DIN standard.

for formulation

of this standard,

decided to revise the same to bring it in line

Circlips made from carbon


retaining components in assembly.

spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
Normally, the circlips are axially assembled either over shafts or inside bores.

When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the ring protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
with the shoulder providing a sharp-cornered
abutment; or a ball bearing with a rediused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder;-or a gear wheel with a chamfered edge which will also have contact
with only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
from that of the sharp cornered abutment.
Thus the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, namely, the circlip, the groove and the
retained part. In case of axial load transmission,
the circlip serves as a means of transferring the load from the
retained part to the groove wall. However, in cases of impact loading, the energy absorbing capacity of the circlip
will be an important factor. The more energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
IS : 3075-1965 dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, IS : 3075-1965 has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with relevant DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and ISI Certification marking clauses have also been included.
This Part 2 of the standard, which covers requirements
of circlips to be assembled inside bores, is
generally based on DIN 472-1981 Circlips (retaining rings) for bores-normal
type and heavy type.
The other two parts of the standard

in this series are:

Part 1 Specification

for circlips for shafts (based on DIN 471-1981); and

Part 3 Specification

for circlips -

Type E for shafts (based on DIN 6799-1981).

HANDBOOK

ON IKDUSTRIAI,~AS1'ENERS_PART3

IS : 3075 (Part 3) - 1986


4

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION

FOR CIRCLIPS

Part 3 Type E for shafts


( First Revision )

. Scope
.l Covers the requirement

of circlips -

.2 Additional

like load-bearing

Note 8.

information

Radially

assembled

Type E for shafts of nominal


capacity,

and detachment

type of circlips for smaller shafts are commonly

size range of 0.8 to 30 mm.


speed have been given in Appendix

known

by the industry

A.

as Type E circlips.

Symbols

:.l For the purpose


ad1 d, d2 d, E FN Fs
Fsg
Rer
g
m
n
Ndr
s

of this standard,

the following

letter symbols

shall apply:

Width of the opening of the unloaded circlip


Shaft diameter
Shaft diameter to which FN refers
Groove diameter = nominal size
Maximum outside diameter at seating in the groove with nominal diameter
Modulus of elasticity
Load-bearing
capacity of the groove with shaft diameter dl at a yield point of the grooved material
of 200 N/mm* (see A-1.1)
Load-bearing
capacity of the circlip at sharp-edged abutment (see 1.2)
Load-bearing
capacity of the circlip at edge distance g (see A-1.2)
Yield point
Edge chamfering distance
Groove width
Collar.width
Detachment speed (see A-2)
Thickness of the circlip

1. Dimensions,

Tolerances and Design Data -

Shall be as given in Table

1.

and Hardness

1. Material

1.1 The circlips shall be manufactured


from spring steel of grade such as 7OC6 or 75C6 conforming
[S : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strips for springs first revision).
1.2 Hardness
Note -

of circlips shall be between 460 and 580 HV (corresponding


Hardness

values converted

as per IS

: 4258-1982 Hardness conversion

to

to 46 to 54 HRC).

tables for metallic

materials

Cfirstrevision).

i. Designation
5.1 A circlip of groove diameter

(nominal

size) d2 = 24 mm shall be designated

CIRCLIP

as:

24 IS : 3075 (Part 3)

i. Finish
i.1 All sharp edges shall be removed from the circlips. The circlips shall be free from burrs, cracks, laminations
*
tnd other defects.
i.2 Unless any alternative finish is specified by the purchaser, the circlips shall be chemically and/ or thermally
slackened or phosphated to class A2 of IS : 3618-1966 Phosphate treatment of iron and steel for protection
against corrosion.
These coated circlips shall be subjected to appropriate
treatment
to avoid hydrogen
:mbrittlement.
Note - In the case of circlips with electroplated surface protection, the upper limit of the thickness smay be exceeded according
the film thickness of the plating required. This shall be taken into account in the design of the groove.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

to

221

TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

AND DESIGN DATA FOR CIRCLIPS

TYPE

( Chuse 3 )
All dimensions in millimetres.

i--4-+---/
-

da--------c
LOADED

UNLOADED

-+u--
ASSEMBLED

*The dimensions specified for groove width m are applicable for general application. For high precision applications and in casts of alternate loading, closer groove width can be chosen. Where accuracy is
tlot so important, wider groove widths can also be specified.
tThe design data applies to circlips of spring steel as per IS : 2507-1975 Specification for cold rolled steel strips for spring Cfirsr revision).

IS: 3075 (Part 3) - 1986


7. ,Tests
7.1 Testing of Material
7.1.1 Vickers hardness test in accordance with IS : 1501 (Part l)-1984 Method for Vickers hardness
metallic materials: Part 1 HV 5 to HV 100 (second revision):

test for

7.1.2 Rockwell hardness test in accordance with IS : 1586-1968 Methods for Rockwell hardness test (B and C
scales) for steel (ji?st revision). In case of doubt, the Vickers hardness test applies. For&clips,
the hardness test
is regarded as a destructive test.
7.2 Testing of the,Toughness
7.2.1 The &clip shall be assembled radially on to a hardened shaft with a diameter
and kept at ambient temperature
for 48 hours. The circlip shall not break.

of 1.1 d2 (nominal

size)

7.3 Testing of Flatness


7.3.1

The circlip shall pass through

7.4 Testing the Function

(Permanent

two parallel

planes with a clearance

of 1.1 s (nominal

size).

Set and Grip Test)

7.4.11The circlip shall be assembled five times radially on to a hardened shaft of diameter dl (minimum
disassembled four times. The circlip shall still sit with force at the fifth assembly.
7.5 Acceptance

Testing

7.5.1 Table 2 applies

TABLE 2

FEATURES

8. Preservation
8.1 A suitable

size) and

to the feature

while Table 3 applies for the acceptable

FOR ACCEPTANCE

TEST

TABLE 3

quality

level (AQL)

ACCEPTABLE

QUALITY

LEVEL

and Packing
anti-corrosive

surface treatment_shall

be given to the circlips for protection

during

transit.

8.2 Unless otherwise specified, the circlips shall be packed in cartons of 100,500 and 1 000 or multiples
Each caiton shall contain circlips of one size only.

thereof.

9. Marking
9.1 The label on the carton
trade-mark.
9.2 ZSZ Certification

224

Marking

shall carry the designation,


-

Details available

number

of pieces and the manufacturers

with the Bureau of lndian

HANDBOOK

name or

Standards.

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 3075 (Part 3) - 1986


APPENDIX

( Clause 1.2 )
ADDITIONAL

INFORMATION
FOR LOAD BEARING
DETACHMENT SPEED

CAPACITY

AND

A-l. Load Bearing Capacity - A circlip connection requires separate calculations for load-bearing capacities
of the groove FN and for the load-bearing
capacity of the circlip F,. In each case, the weaker part is that which
applies. The load bearing capacities listedin 3 (FN, F,, Fsg) contain no safety against yielding under fluctuating
stress. There is at least twice the level of safety against fracture under static stress.
A-l.1 Load Bearing Capacity of Groove, FN - The FN values in Table 1 (load bearing capacity of the groove)
are applicable to grooves in parts made out of materials up to 200 N/mm* yield point, for collar lengths n and
refer to the shaft diameter dl.
FPJfor materials

The load bearing capacity,


proportional
to the yield point.

FN=

The load bearing


using the formula:

with yield point Rfer.deviating

FN. _!!I%
200

capacity of the groove F!.J, in case of shaft diameter

FIN

FN,

from 200 N/mm* is directly

dl deviating

from ~1, is calculated

d1- d2
d, - d2

A-l.2 Load Bearing Capacity of Circlip, Fs - The load bearing capacity of the circlip Fs according
applicable for a sharp edged abutment of the mating machine part (see Fig. 1).
The values F,, are applicable
(see 3, read with Fig. 2).

FIG.

ABUTMENT

WITH

for an abutment

SHARP

with edge chamfering

FIG. 2

EDGE

distance g (chamfering

to 3 is

or rounding)

ABUTMENT
WITH CHAMFERED
RADIUSED
EDGE

OR

Both values F, and FsBare applicable for circlip materials with a modulus of elasticity (Youngs modulus
E) of 210 000 N/ mm2. If circlips made of any other material with a different Youngs modulus Eare used, the
load bearing capacity of the circlip is directly proportional
to the Youngs modulus E:
Fs = F,.
F;, = Fs,

E
210 000
E
210 000

If the edge chamfering distance g= deviates from those given in 3, the, load bearing capacity of the circlip
is inversely proportional
to the edge distance.
Fsg = F,,

_i!-.

g
Note -

HANDBOOK

in case of smaller values of g is greater than F,, then F, applies.

ON INDUSTRlAL

FASTENERS-PART

225

IS: 3075 (Part 3) - 1986


A-2. Detachment
A-2.1

Speed

The application

(Nds)

of circlips is limited

by those speeds which can lead to a lifting of the circlips.

Therefore, detachment
speeds Nds at which this lifting can occur are specified
applicable only for circlips made out of spring steels as specified in 4.

EXPLANATORY

in 3. The values are

NOTE

This standard was issued in 1965, as a comprehensive


standard based on draft DIN 6799-1963, for
dimensions.
Consequently,
DIN standard was revised completely with the inclusion of testing and acceptance
requirements.
However, the sizes and range remain the same, as that of earlier DIN revision. This standard is
being revised to bring it in line with the DIN standard.
Circlips made from carbon spring steel strips or bars serve as radial spring fasteners for positioning and
retaining components in assembly. Normally, the circlipsare either axially assembled (either over shafts or inside
bores) or radially assembled over shafts.
When the circlips are assembled, a portion of the ring protrudes from the groove to form a shoulder to
support the abutting part. The part to be retained may be; a ground thrust washer having a full surface contact
with the shoulder providing a sharp-cornered
abutment; or a ball bearing with a radiused edge which will have
contact with only a portion of the shoulder; or a gear wheel with a chamfered edge which will also have contact
with only a portion of the shoulder. The large corner radius or chamfer will result in a different type of assembly
from that of the sharp cornered abutment.
Thus, the fastening system using circlips depends on three elements, that is the circlip, the groove and the
retained part. In case of axial load transmission,
the circlip servesas a means of transferring the load from the
retained part to the groove wall. However, in cases of impact loading, the energy absorbing capacity of the circlip
will be an important factor. The more the energy absorbed, the less will be transferred to the grooved wall.
This standard dealt with the dimensions and other requirements for all types of circlips. In the present
revision, this standard has been divided into three parts to bring it in line with relevant DIN standards. Testing,
acceptance criteria, packaging and BIS certification marking clauses have also been included.
This Part 3 of the standard covers requirements of thecirclips of radially assembled type, most commonly
known as Etype, used for smaller shafts. Inaddition to this, the requirements of circlips, axially assembled over
shafts having diameters 3 to 300 mm, normal and heavy types have been covered in Part 1 of this standard.
Other two parts of the standard

226

in this series are:

Part 1 Specification

for circlips for shafts

Part 2 Specification

for circlips for bores.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :4162 - 1984
.

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
FOR
WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS
GENERAL PURPOSES
( First Revision )

FOR

I
Covers the requirements for worm drive hose clamps for general purposes.

I. Scope -

2. Nomenclature

For the purpose of this standard, the nomenclature given in Fig. 1 shall apply.
THRUST WASHER OR
RETAINING PLATE

END OF SCREW
RIVETED OR SPUN

FIG. 1

TYPICA , DESIGN AND NOMENCLATURE

3. Dimensions

FOR WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS

Shall be as given in Table 1.

1. Material - The materials used in the manufacture of worm drive hose clamps shall be selected at the
manufacturers discretion provided that the finished clamps meet the test requirements specified in 10.
5. Manufacture
5.1 Screw -

Shall be held captive in the clamp housing.

5.2 Band - Shall have a thread form commencing at the free end and extending for a length sufficient to enable
tn
nn tn
cmalbrt
ciiam~tw rrf
ranee
_________
. . rnmnnnent
__ ...r-~~_~~~ within the workine
L hC tinhtend
Cn6.xCWU1.
. the
. . . . *.......~Y.
U......v.-.
51~~
--Y for which it is
designed.
1~ rlallly
-r--n
L,,b

5.3 Housing -

Shall not be readily removable from the band.

6. Designation - The hose clamps conforming to this standard shall be designated by nomenclature, size and
number of this standard.
6.1 A hose clamp of size 25 mm shall be designated as:
Hose Clamp 25 IS : 4762
7. General Requirements
7.1 When the loop is formed, as shown in Fig. 1, the screw shall be held firmly in engagement with the band
during tightening and the clamp shall be capable of being decreased in diameter by turning the screw in clockwise
direction and increased in diameter by turning the screw in anti-clockwise direction.

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

221

IS : 4762- 1984
w
TABLE 1

DIMENSIONS

FOR WORM DRIVE HOSE CLAMPS


( Clause 3 )

All dimensions in millimetres.

Size

12
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160

22s

Suitable

for Hose Outer Diameters

Min

Jp to and Including

9
12
14
16
I&
20
22
25
30
30
32
38
42
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
95
100
Ii0
125
125
135
140

I2
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160

X
Max

12
16
20
22
25
28
30
35
38
40
45
50
55
60
70
75
80
90
100
110
115
120
130
140
145
150
160

T
9
12
14
16
18
20
22
25
30
30
32
38
42
45
50
55
60
70
80
90
95
100
110
125
125
135
140

HANDBOOK

2
Max

14
14
14
20
20
25
25
25
25
25
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28
28

8N INDUSTRIAL

25
25
25
25
25
30
30
30
30
30
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33
33

FASTENERS-PART

IS : 4762 - 1984
7.2 Atter expanding until the band is disconnected from the screw it shall be possible to open clamps of size
35 and above to provide a gap equal to the largest diameter of the hose for which the clamp is designed and
to permit easy fitting and removal of the clamp by passing the clamp over the hose in position without
disturbing any connections.
7.3 The clamp shall be so designed that when tightened on the hose, it shall remain positively secured in
position without the need for any additional locking device and in firm engagement with the hose on which
it is fitted.
8. Finish - All component
parts of the clamp shall be smooth and free from burrs and sharp edges.
Clamps other than those manufactured
from corrosion-resistant
materials shall be protected against
corrosion by electroplating in accordance with classification No. Cd8 of IS : 1572 - 1968 Specification for
electroplating
coatings of cadmium on iron and steel virsi revision)or classifjcation No. FeZnl2 of IS :
1573-1970 Specification for electroplating
coatings of zinc on non and steel yir.st revision).
Plating
9. Sampling

shall be applied
and Acceptance

after any welding operation

prior to final assembly.

Criteria

9.1 In order to ensure the quality and reliability of the assembly it is necessary that all its components
conform rigidly to the specified requirements. It is recommended that method given in IS : 397 Method for,
statistical quality control during production:Part
1 - 1972 Control charts for variables Cfirst revisionhand
Part 2 - 1975 Control charts for attributes and count ofdefects (First revision) be used to control the
quality of component
during production.
This will also ensure the homogeneity of the product which is
necessary for successful operation of the sampling procedure given below.
9.2 In any consignment,
all the hose clamps of the same size manufactured
conditions shall be grouped together to constitute a lot.
9.3 Hose clamps shall be selected and examined
the requirements
of this standard.

under essentially

for each lot separately for ascertaining

similar

their conformity

to

9.4 The number of hose clamps to be selected shall depend on the size of the lot and shall be in accordance
withtcol 1 and 2 of .Table 2. These shall be selected at rapdom.
9.5 Number

of Tests and Criteria for Confokmity

9.5.J The hose clamps selected according to 9.4 shall be examined for band (see 5.2) housing (see 5.3),
screw (see 5.1), dimensions (see 3) finish (see 8) and general requirements (see 7). If the number of hose
clamps failing to meet the requirements for any one or more of the above characteristics is less than or equal
to the acceptance number given in coi 3 of Table 2, the lot shall be considered as conforming to the
requirements
of these characteristics.
9.5.2 In case of those lots which have been found satisfactory according to 9.5.1, the number of hose
clamps each equivalent to the sub-sample size indicated in co1 4 of Table 2 shall be chosen and subjected to
the torque tests (see 10.1, 10.2 and 10.3) and hydraulic pressure test (see 10.4). The lot shall be considered
and conforming to the requirements of above characteristics if none of the hose clamps subjected to either
of the tests, fails to meet the specified requirement.

TABLE

SAMPLE, SIZE AND CRITERIA FOR CONFORMITY


( Clauses 9.4, 9.5.1 and 9.5.2 j

Lot Size

Sample Size

(1)

(2)
8
13
20
32
50

1 001 and above


*To ensure that the lot containing

ON INDUSTRIAL

2.5 percent or less defectives

FASTENERS-PART

Number*

(3)
0
0

up to 100
101 to 150
151 to 300
301 to 500
501 to 1 000

HANDBOOK

Acceptance

I
I
2
3
will be accepted

most of the times.

Sub-sample
(4)
2
2
3
5
8
13

Size

IS :4762 - 1984
9.5.3 The lot shall be declared as conforming
and 9.5.2 are satisfied.

to the requirements

of this standard

if conditions

given in9.W

10. Tests
10.1 Free-turning Torque Test - This test shall be conducted to ensure the smooth action of the lubricated
clamp in its free-turning state. For this purpose, the torque required to move the screw in either direction shall
not exceed 1.5 Nm.
10.2 Torque Test - The test shall be conducted with the hose clamp in lubricated condition mounted on a rigid
mandrel of a diameter equal to the designating size of the clamp. A suitable test rig is shown in Fig. 2. Alternative
methods of applying the torque load are permissible provided that the conditions imposed by the torque rig
illustrated in -Fig. 2are simulated exactly:

PULLEYS

SPRING

BALANCE

BALANCE

WEIGHT

TING
AOJUSTER

FIG.2

DIAGRAMMATIC

ARRANGEMENT

OF TYPICAL

RIG FOR TORQUE

TEST

The clamp shall be tightened to 75 percent of the appropriate torque load as shown below.On release of
the torque load, visual examination
of the assembly shall reveal no sign of permanent distortion of the housing
nor damage detrimental to the efficient functioning
of the clamp. The clamp shall then be retightened until
permanent distortion or failure occurs. The torque load at permanent distortion or failure shall be in excess of the
appropriate value shown below:
Size
12?Zrn 20
22 to 28
30 to 40
45 to 60
70 to 160

Torque
Nm
4.51
5.49
6.77
7.94
9.02

10.3 Fatique Torque Lading


Test - The test shall be conducted with the same set up described in 10.2. The
clamp shall then be subjected to a torque loading and release of torque loading to the values specified in 10.2, at
least 10 times, without resulting in any distortion or permanent deformation
of the clamp as a whole.

230

HANDBOOK.ONINDUSTRIALFASTENERS-PART3

IS : 4762- 1984
10.4

Hydraulic

Pressure

Test

10.4.1 The test shall be conducted on a joint assembly asshown in Fig. 3 using a hose of outside diameter equal
to the mean of the working range of the clamp. The hose shall comply with the requirements of IS : 444 - 1980
Specification for rubber water hose (third revesion). Two samples of each size of clamp shall be tested and the
following conditions shall be observed.
10.4.2 Test procedure - The hose and clamps shall be assembled on a pair of round, parallel, externally
smooth and polished metal pipes, one of which shall be blanked at its outer end and provided with a bleed screw
to permit release of air. This pipe shall be free to move axially so that the external pressure through the outer pipe
produces a tensile load on the joints.

E CLAMPS

FIG. 3 ARRANGEMENT

10.4.3

torque

The torque to be applied


value specified in 10.2

FOR HYDRAIJLIC

when tightening

UNDER

PRESSURE

TEST

TEST

the clamps shall not exceed 75 percent of the appropriate

10.4.4 The fluid used for the test shall be water at room temperature. Pressure shall be applied gradually from
an external source until leakage or other failure occurs, at which stage the pressure shall not be less than the
appropriate
value specified below:
Size

Minimum

Pressure

M pa
*2:m30
35, to 70
75 to 160
11. Marking - The hose clamps shall be permanently
the nominal size ( see Table 1 ).

11.1 ZSZ Certifjcation

Marking

Details available

1.41
0.84
0.42
marked with the manufacturers
with the Indian

Standards

name or trademark

and

Institution.

This standard was originally published in 1968. In view of the experience gained by the Indian Industry
this field, the standard is being revised. In this revision manufacturer has been provided with greater flexibility
the design of the hose clamps.

in
in

While revising this standard considerable assistance has been derived from BS 53 15 - 1976 Hose clamps
(worm drive type) for general purpose use (metric series), issued by the British Standards Institution.

IS :5988 - 1970

Indian Standard

SPECIFICATION
( LIGHT AND HEAVY

1. Scope 2. Dimensions

Requirements

FOR SPRING DOWEL SLEEVES


PATTERNS ) FOR USE IN FOUNDRIES

for spring dowel sleeves for use in foundries.

Also used as spring dowel pins.

and Tolerances

2.1 As given in Tables

1 to 4 and in Fig. 1.

--

N0Mlwl OU %nm AND.*BOVt

All dimensions

FIG. 1 SPRING

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

FOR SPRING

--

in millimetres.

DOWEL

DOWEL

SLEEVES

SLEEVES

( LIGHT

PATTERN

1
Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L

I
Nominal
Diameter
mm

Before Fitting

Tolerance
on d,

dl

2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
7
8
IO
11
12
13
I4
16

0.2
0.25
0.3
0.35
0.5
0.5
0.5
0.75
0.75
0.75

1
I
I

i._
1.25
1.5
1
~__IY5., .!

0.35
0.45
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
I.6
1.6
I.6
2
2
2
2
2
2
2

.-

2.3
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.4
4.8
5.4
6.4
7.5
8.5
10.5
__-I
11.5
12.5
13.5
14:5
16.5

+ 0.1

+ 0.2

+ 0.3

Q
w

For Bolt
Size
_ [IS: 4218
(Part 6)1967*] 6g

1.9
2.3
2.7
3. I
3.4
3.8
4.4
4.9
6.0
7.0
8.5
9.5
10.5

Corres-

1 ponding
Washer
(IS : 20161967t)

11.0
1

11.5
I
13.5
,....
i
._.. _._

_.MI2
:
___ _

13
..__,

4-30
4-30
4-40
4-40
4-50
4-50
5-80
IO-100
10-100
IO-120
IO-160
IO-160
IO-180
IO-180
IO-180
IO-200
.*

7
I
1

(Continued)

232

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

IS :5988 - 1970

TABLE

DIMENSIONS

Nominal
Diameter
mm

FOR SPRING

DOWEL

2.

$75

21

23
25
28
30
35
40
45
50

1
I

;
2.5
2.5
3.5
4
4
5

I
:

18.5
20.5
21.5
23.5
?5.5
28.5
30.5
35.5
40.5
45.5
50.5

2
2
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4

PATTERN)

For Bolt
Size
[IS : 4218
(Part 6)1967*] 6g

---

(LIGHT

Before Fitting

II

Tolerance
on dl

;t

SLEEVES

>%ontd

Corres-

ponding
Washer
(IS : 20161967?)

*
1_5.0_
16.5

Ml4
-

!,r
17
19
21
23
25
28
31
37
40

MI6
Ml8
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30
M36
M39

--

Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L
1O-200
IO-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200

dowel sleeve (light pattern) of 10 mm nominal diameter and length 40 mm to be designated


Spring Dowel Sleeve Lighi 10 X 40 IS : 5988.
*ISO metric screw threads : Part 6 Limits of sizes for commercial bolts and nut& (diameter range I to 5.2 mm).
tspecification
for plain washers C&r revision).
Designorion

-- Spring

TABLE

Nominal
Diameter
mm

DIMENSIONS

FOR SPRING DOWEL


( Clause 2.1 )

Before Fitting

dr

I
1.5
2
2.5
3
3.5
4
4.5
5
6
8
10
12
13
14
16
18
20
21
25
28
30
32
35
38
40
45
50

0.2
0.3
0.4
0.5
0.6
0.75
0.8

1
I
1.25
1.5
2
2.5
2.5
3
3
3.5
4
4
5
5.5
6
6
7
7.5
7.5
8.5
9.5

Designorion

SLEEVES

0.15
0.25
0.35
0.45
0.5
0.6
0.7
0.8
1.6
1.6
2
2
2
2
.2
2
2
3
3
3
3
3
3
3
4
4
4
4

+ 0.1

+ 0.2

+ 0.3

+ 0.4

of 10 mm nominal

Size
[IS : 4218
(Part 6)19671 6g

0.8
1.1
1.5
1.8
2. I
2.3
2.8

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

Corresponding
Washer
(IS : 2016
1967)

Preferred
Length
Range
(from Up
to and
Including)
L

4-20
4-20
4-30
4-30
4-40
4-40
4-50
5-50
5-80
10-100
IO-120
IO-160
IO-180
IO-180
IO-200
IO-200
IO-200
I O-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
14-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200
20-200

2.9
3.4
3.9
5.5
6.5
7.5
8.5
8.5
10.5
11.5
12.5
13.5
15.5
17.5
18.5
20.5
21.5
23.5
25.5
28.5
31.5
diameter

Spring Dowel Sleeve Heavy 10 X 40 IS

HANDBOOK

PATTERN)

I For Bolt

Tolerance
on d,

1.2
1.7
2.3
2.8
3.3
3.8
4.4
4.9
5.4
6.4
8.5
10.5
12.5
13.5
14.5
16.5
18.5
20.5
21.5
25.5
28.5
30.5
32.5
35.5
38.5
40.5
45.5
50.5

Spring dowel sleeve (heavy pattern)

(HEAVY

--

M3
M4
M5
M6
-

3.2
4.3
5.3
6.4

ME
MI0
-

8.4
10.5

Ml2
Ml4
Ml6
-

13
15
17

Ml8
M20
M22
M24
M27
M30

19
21
23
25
28
31

and length 40 mm to be designated

: 5988.

as:

IS : 5988 - 1970
TABLE 3

PREFERRED
( Chse 2. I

LENGTHS

Length

In Steps of

mm

mm

4to 6
6 o 32

2
4
5
20

32 7. 40
40 ,, 100
100 ,, 200

TABLE 4

TOLERANCES
ON LENGTH
( Clause 2.1 )

Length

Tolerance

mm

mm

4to 10
IL?,, 50
so ,, 200

+ 0.5
+ 1.0
+ 1.5

3. Tolerance
3.1 The nominal diameter of sleeve is also the nominal
bore shall be H 12.

diameter

of the receiving

bore. Tolerance

on receiving

3.2 The width of the longitudinal


gap in the sleeve shall be not less than the difference
dr and nominal diameter of the sleeve with a maximum tolerance equal to the tolerance
This gap size is applicable when the sleeve is not inserted.

between dimension
on dimension di.

4. Material i

150 to 190 kgf/mm*

5. Technical

Spring steel 55Si2Mn90,


Requirements

heat treated to 445 to 515 HVand

tensile strength

and Tests

5.1 The surface of spring dowel sleeves shall be smooth and free from scale and burr. The outer edges along the
slit and around the ends shall normally be deburred, but alternatively may be slightly rounded.
5.2 Shear Strength - Shear strength shall not be less than 0.45 times the tensile strength. Test method in
accordance with IS : 5242-1969 Methods of test for determining shear strength of mild steel, but with shearing
edges of 700 HV, Min.
5.3 Resilience and Recovery Test - Resilience and recovery shall be tested by driving the sleeve ten times
through a hole of nominal size, within the tolerance zone H6 in a hardened steel plate of St 60. The maximum
reduction in the oversize on the diameter shall not exceed 50 percent of the oversize in delivery condition, for
example, the outside diameter shall not be less than 10.25 mm on reduction from 10.5 mm for a spring dowel
sleeve of 10 mm nominal diameter.
6. Sampling

7. Marking -

In accordance

with IS : 2614-1964 Methods

The sleeves shall be marked

a) Designation,
b) Trade-mark
7.1 ISI Certlpcation

for sampling

of fasteners.

with the following:

and
or name of the manufacturer.
Marking

Details available

from the Indian

Standards

Institution,

8. Packing
8.1 A thin film of rust preventive
8.2 Packed in waterproof

oil shall be applied.

paper and placedin

cartons

or wooden boxes in bundles

8.3 Packets may be placed in wooden

boxes weighing not more than 50 kg overall.

8.4 Packets

described

shall bear the information

9. General Conditions of Delivery - In accordance


metallurgical
meterials (first revision).

234

under 7, and also the number

of 10, 25 or 50.

of pieces.

with IS : 1387-1967 General requirements

HANDBOO&

ON INDUSTRIAL

for the supply of

FASTENERS-PART

INDEX

Aircraft
Rivets for
100 countersunk
aluminium
alloy 9087
100 countersunk
nickel alloy 9093
Universal head aluminium
alloy 9086
Universal head nickel alloy 9088
Bifurcated rivets 3974
Boiler rivets 1928
Circlip 3075
Clamps, hose 4762
Clevis pin 6862
with head 6863
Cotton, set 2995
Copper wire nails 725
Cotters
Flat, split 2638
Pin, split 549
Cut lath nails 6734
Cylindrical pins 2393, 6689, 10248
Dowel pins
For foundries 6401
Spring 5988
Grooved 7385
Dowel sleeves 5988
Felt nails 6730
Gib-head keys and keyways 2293
Grooved pins 7368, 7384, 7385, 7386
Guide pins 4981
Hose clamps 4762
Keys and keyways
Gib-head 2293
Parallel 2048
For machine tools 2710
Thin 6167
Tangential 2291
Taper 2292
Thin 6266
Woodruff 2294
Knuckle pins 7383
Lath nails 6734
Nails
Copper 725
Countersunk
head 723
Cut lath and lath 6734
Double point 6732
Felt 6730
Lost head 6738
Panel pins 6738
Wall and roofing 6733
Panel pins 6738
Parallel keys keyways 2048
For machine tools 2710
Pins
Clevis 6862

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART

with head 6863


Cylindrical
Hardened 6689
Unhardened
2393
With internal threads 10248
Dowel
For foundries 6401
Spring 5988
Grooved
Dowel 7385
Knuckle 7383
Socket 7386
Straight 7384
Taper 7368
Guide 4981
,Locating
Panel 6738
Spiral
Heavy duty 8351
Medium duty 8379
Taper 6688
Grooved 7368
Threaded 3524
Rivets
Aircraft
Aluminium/ alloy
100 countersunk
9087
Universal head 9086
100 countersunk
nickel alloy 9093
Universal head 9088
Bifurcated 3974
Boiler 1928
Cold closing 2998
General purpose 1929
Hot ciosing 2155
Non-ferrous 2907
Shipbuilding
4732
Tinmens 866
Tubular and semi-tubular
4040
Set collars 2995
Shipbuilding
rivets 4732
Sleeves, dowel 5988
Socket pins 7366
Spiral pins 8351, 8379
Split totters 2638
Split pins 549
Spring dowel sleeves 5988
Tangential keys and keyways 2291
Taper keys and keyways 2292, 6166
Taper pins 7368
Tinmens rivets 866
Tubular rivets 4040
Woodruff keys and keyways 2294

235

As in the Original Standard, this Page is Intentionally Left Blank

Numerical

IS Number

549-1974
723-1972
725-1961
866-1957
1928-1961
1929-1982
2048-1983
2155-1982
2291-1981
2292-l 974
2293-1974
2294-1980
2393- 1980
2638- 1974
2907- 1964
2995- 1965
2998-1982
3075 (Part
3075 (Part
3075 (Part
3524 (Part
3524 (Part
3974- 1967
4040-l 967
4732-l 968
4762-l 984

HANDBOOK

Page

IS Number

Page

4981-1984
5988-1970
6166-1971
6167-1971
6401-1971
6688-1981
6689-1972
6730-I 972
6732-l 972
6733-1972
6734-1972
6738-1972
6862-l 98 1
6863-1973
7368-1974
7383-1974
7384-1974
7385-1974
7386-l 974
8351-1977
8379-1977
9086-1979
9087-1979
9088- 1979
9093- 1979
10248-d 982

1)-1987
2)-1987
3)-1987
1)-1982
2)-1982

ON INDUSTRIAL

Index

FMTENERS-PART

237
I

IS0 STANDARDS

S. No.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.

238

ON RIVETS, PINS AND OTHER NON-THReADED

IS0 : No.

245
R 1051
1234
2338
2339
2340
2341
8733
8736
8737
8739
8740
8741
8742
8743
8744
8745
8746
8747

1986 :
1969 :
1976 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :
1986 :

FASTENERS

Title
Aircraft-lockwire
Rivet shank diameters (diameter range 1 to 36mm)
Split pins-Metric series
Parallel pins, unhardened
Taper pins, unhardened
Clevis pins without head
Clevis pins with head
Parallel pins .with internal thread, unhardened
Taper pins with internal thread; unhardened
Taper pins with external thread, unhardened
Grooved pins-Full-length parallel grooved, with pilot
Grooved pins-Full length parallel grooved, with chamfer
Grooved pins-Half-length
reverse taper grooved
Grooved pins-Third-length
centre grooved
Grooved pins-Half-length centre grooved
Grooved pins-Full-length taper grooved
Grooved pins-Half-length taper grooved
Grooved pins with round head
Grooved pins with countersunk head

HANDBOOK

ON INDUSTRIAL

FASTENERS-PART